JP6535256B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a predetermined result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the game ball winning in the start opening provided in the game area (start prize). The variable display game in which the variable display is started is variably displayed, and when the mode of the plurality of identification information stopped after the predetermined time has elapsed is a predetermined special result mode, a special game of paying out many prize balls to the player There is a game state in which the player gains many benefits. Among such pachinko machines, there has been proposed a machine that enables generation of effects based on the introduction date to a game arcade using a real time clock (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2012-231921, A

  However, it is required to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction effect different from other game machines.

  An object of the present invention is to make it possible to perform an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction effect different from other game machines.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a predetermined result.
Content setting means for setting any one of a plurality of contents;
Effect control means for executing an effect corresponding to the content set by the content setting means, and displaying an image relating to the content on a display device;
A release condition is set for each of the plurality of contents,
The content setting means can set any one of the contents satisfying the release condition among the plurality of contents,
The effect control means is
During a predetermined period, the display area of the display device is divided into a plurality of areas corresponding to each of the plurality of contents,
In the area corresponding to the content satisfying the release condition, regardless of whether or not the content is set by the content setting means, the video concerning the content is set by the content setting means In the same way ,
In the area corresponding to the content not satisfying the release condition, it is possible to display video other than the video related to the content.

The invention according to claim 3 is
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a predetermined result.
Content setting means for setting any one of a plurality of contents;
Effect control means for executing an effect corresponding to the content set by the content setting means, and displaying an image relating to the content on a display device;
A release condition is set for each of the plurality of contents,
The content setting means can set any one of the contents satisfying the release condition among the plurality of contents,
The effect control means is
During a predetermined period, the display area of the display device is divided into a plurality of areas corresponding to each of the plurality of contents,
In the area corresponding to the content satisfying the release condition, regardless of whether or not the content is set by the content setting means, the video concerning the content is set by the content setting means In the same way ,
In the area corresponding to the content not satisfying the release condition, it is possible to display a video related to the content in a state where the amount of information obtained from the video is limited.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to carry out an effect capable of obtaining a further customer attraction effect differentiated from other game machines.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a prize winning device. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display. It is a figure explaining the detail of an effect operation part. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining starting opening error monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit decision processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1, (b) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. (A) is a flow chart explaining distribution processing, and (b) is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flow chart explaining end processing per common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining model release monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining hole / player setting mode processing. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining customer waiting demo edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining model forced switching processing. It is a flow chart explaining player type selection processing. It is a flow chart explaining production point control processing. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation customization process. It is a figure explaining an installed model and a non-installed model. It is a figure explaining the timing of the fluctuation production corresponding to each mounting model. It is a figure explaining screen division reach. It is a figure explaining screen division reach. It is a figure explaining screen division reach. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining model forced switching. It is a figure explaining the same model continuation conditions corresponding to the number of continuations. It is a figure explaining production customization. It is a figure explaining production customization. It is a figure explaining production customization. It is a figure explaining production customization. It is a figure explaining production customization. It is a figure explaining production customization.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, on the upper part of the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor inside and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided. In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 which incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or effect, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect). There is. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Furthermore, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a rendering operation unit 550 for receiving an operation input from the player is provided. The effect operation unit 550 is the effect button 25 incorporating the effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 contacts the player A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key 26 for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  In addition, on the front of the glass frame 15 above the upper tray 21, a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card being ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, by the player operating the effect operation unit 550, in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect such as causing the player's operation to intervene is performed. Can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the upper right portion of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for providing a game effect by operating is provided. The panel effect device 44 includes two arms having a sub display device 42 attached to the tip end thereof, and the sub display device 42 is rotated relative to the display device 41 by pivoting the arm about the base end. It is possible to convert the state of overlapping in the front-rear direction and the state of not overlapping.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 6).

In addition, on the left side of the common drawing start gate 34, a normal change winning device 37 (starting winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view variable display game (special view 2 variable display game) is provided. ing.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and a partition 37d for restricting the flow of the game ball ing. The movable member 37b always stands upright so as to keep the distance from the partition 37d equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball, that is, the closed state (convenient for the player) in which the gaming ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 6) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 6).

Furthermore, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept There is.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by, for example, a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 6) as a drive device. By converting the closed state of the mouth to the open state, the flow of the game ball into the big winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 6) is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

Further, below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special view for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game (special view 1 variation display game) There is provided a winning device 90 provided with a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the variable display game (special view 2 variable display game).
The winning device 90 is provided with a sorting member 92 which alternately distributes the gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 90a in the upper part into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 6), and the gaming ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 has the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 6) Is detected by
Further, below the winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that have not been won in a winning port or the like.

Fig.3 (a)-(c) is a front view of the prize-winning device 90 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the state which removed the front cover member.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the winning device 90 is provided with a distributing member 92 at a position immediately below the inflow port 90a in the inside thereof. Further, a first start winning combination port 36 is disposed at the lower left of the distributing member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is disposed at the lower right of the distributing member 92.
Furthermore, a front cover member is provided to cover the front of the distributing member 92, the first start winning opening 36, and the second start winning opening 97. The front cover member is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the gaming ball in the winning device 90 can be viewed.

The distributing member 92 is rotatable about an axial pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and an upper arm 92b extending upward from a position where the axial pin 92a is disposed and a left arm 92c extending leftward And a right arm 92d extending rightward. Of the three arms, a left holding portion 92e for temporarily holding a game ball is formed by the upper arm 92b and the left arm 92c on the left of the upper arm 92b, and on the right of the upper arm 92b The upper arm 92b and the right arm 92d form a right holding portion 92f that temporarily holds the gaming ball.
With the upper arm 92b always facing upward, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), the distributing member 92 can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f can be pivoted between a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a.

As shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding portion 92e is in a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, the right holding portion 92f faces the second start winning opening 97 and the gaming ball is It will flow down.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, the left holding portion 92e is directed to the first start winning opening 36 It will be in the state which made the ball flow down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3A, the distributing member side magnet 96a is attached to the rear of the upper arm 92b of the distributing member 92. Further, of the base member 93 to which the distributing member 92 is attached from the front, the base member side magnet 96b is attached at a position facing the distributing member side magnet 96a when the upper arm 92b is vertical. There is. The distributing member-side magnet 96a and the base member-side magnet 96b are attached such that the opposing poles are the same pole, and the upper arm 92b of the distributing member 92 is vertical due to the repulsive force of the magnets 96a and 96b. It is urged to turn to either left or right without staying in the state of becoming. As a result, in a state in which the rotation of the distributing member 92 is stopped, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f can receive the gaming ball which has flowed into the inflow port 90a.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (c), the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a is ready to be received toward the inflow port 90a of the left holding portion 92e and the right holding portion 92f. It is held by one holder. When the game ball is held by one of the holding portions, the weight of the game ball causes the distributing member 92 to rotate in the direction of the one holding portion, and the held gaming ball is rotated by the distributing member 92. It flows down toward the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 in the direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), when the game ball which has flowed in the left holding portion 92e is received, the distributing member 92 is turned to the left by the weight of the game ball and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3C, the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where it can receive the next game ball. Then, as shown in FIG. 3 (c), when the game ball which has flowed in the right holding portion 92f is received, the distributing member 92 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball and the game ball is moved to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3B, the left holding portion 92e stops in a state where it can receive the next game ball.

  There is a high possibility that the game balls flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f may flow into the first start winning hole 36 or the second start winning hole 97, but they may not flow in, and if they do not flow out of the winning device 90 leak. In particular, when the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the fluid does not flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97. In addition, you may be comprised so that it may be prize-winning by any starting prize-winning opening.

  Further, when the distributing member 92 rotates, the other holding portion which is not the holding portion holding the gaming ball is in a state of being able to be received toward the inflow port 90a. Then, the game ball accepted next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding unit side. As a result, the game balls sequentially flowing into the inflow port 90a are alternately distributed to the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 97.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) so that the player can aim for the winning to the winning device 90, and the game ball is fired to the right side game area (so-called right It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by striking.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the collective display device 50 is a special view 1 display for the first special view variation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like as shown in FIG. Fluctuation display part) 51a (D1) and the special figure 2 display (the second special figure fluctuation display part) 51b (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a common drawing fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps Variable display unit 52 (common view display unit) 52 (D10, D18), and storage display units 53, 54, 55 (D11 to D16) for informing the starting memory number of each variable display game similarly formed of LED lamps. Equipped with

  In addition, a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator, right strike notification unit) 56 (D8) that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state is more advantageous to hit the right than to hit the left. ), A second gaming status display unit (second gaming status indicator, time saving status notification unit) 57 (D9) that lights up when time saving status occurs and notifies time saving status occurrence; probability of big hit when the gaming machine 10 is powered on The third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 58 (D17) indicating that the state is a high probability state, the number of rounds at the big hit (opening and closing of the special fluctuation winning device 38 A round display unit 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit.

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51a and the special view 2 display 51b is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51a, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also blinked to drive variation. The display of the inside is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed with the result mode (e.g., numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the offset being on as the result mode of the hit (special result mode).

  The common indicator 52 blinks the lamp during fluctuation to indicate that it is fluctuating, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the symbol number for variation is “0” out of the lamps D10 and D18 constituting the common view display 52 (that is, the game result is lost) ), Only the lamp D10 is turned on, and only the lamp D18 is turned on when the variation symbol number is “1” (ie, the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is “1”). When the variation symbol number is "2" (ie, when the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is "2"), both the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

  Further, the common drawing suspension display 55 displays the number of start memories (= the number of holdings) of the common drawing start gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 52 by turning off, blinking and lighting a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, of the lamps D15 and D16 that constitute the common view reservation display 55, when the number of reservations is "0", both the lamps D15 and D16 are selected. When the number of reservations is "1", only the lamp D15 is turned on. When the number of reservations is "2", both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on. When the number of reservations is "3" Is configured to turn on the lamp D15 and turn on the lamp D16, and to turn on both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 when the number of reservations is "4".

  The special figure 1 reserve display 53 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of first start memories (special figure 1 reserve) which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51a. Displayed by blinking or lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, of the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special view 1 suspension display 53, when the number of special view start memories is “0”, the lamp D11 and When both lamps D12 are turned off, and when the number of start memories is "1", only lamp D11 is turned on. When the number of start memories is "2", both lamps D11 and D12 are turned off. The lamp D11 is turned on and the lamp D12 is turned on when the number of start memories is "3", and the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are set when the number of start memories is "4". Is configured to cause both sides to blink.

  The special figure 2 reserve display 54 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of second start memories (special figure 2 reserve) which is the right to execute the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 51 b. , Blink, display by lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, of the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special view 2 suspension display 54, when the number of special view 2 start memories is “0”, the lamp D13 and When both lamps D14 are turned off, and when the number of starting memories is "1", only lamp D13 is lit, and when the number of starting memories is "2", both lamps D13 and D14 are turned off. Is turned on, the lamp D13 is turned on and the lamp D14 is turned on when the number of start memories in the special view 2 is "3", and the number of lights stored in the start table is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. Is configured to cause both sides to blink.

  The first gaming state display unit (right hitting notification unit) 56 is composed of an LED lamp etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (f), the gaming condition in which the left hitting is more advantageous than the right hitting (normal hitting state In the case of), the lamp is turned off, and in the gaming state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting (right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time reduction state notification unit) 57 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, in the normal game state where time reduction state is not generated At the time), the lamp is turned off, and when the short time condition is occurring (during the short time operation), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 58 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probable change state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 59 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, for example, turns off the lamp when not in the special game state based on the jackpot, and corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the lamp. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, when the selected number of rounds is "16" among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 59, the lamps D3, D5, and D7 are lit. In the state, when the number of rounds selected is "2", the lamps D4 and D6 are configured to be in the lighting state. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 5 shows details of the effect operation unit 550.
FIG. 5A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment is configured to include an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. It is done. That is, the effect operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

  Then, sensitivity setting data and LED brightness data are transmitted from the effect control board (effect control device) 300 to the effect operation unit 550, and from the effect operation portion 550 to the effect control board (effect control device) 300, an effect button The push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the (push button) 25 and the touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a included in the touch panel 29 are output It is configured to be

  In the case of the present embodiment, a pressing operation on the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 550 (a pressing operation of pushing the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 550 and pressing down the rendering operation unit 550) by the presentation button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the presentation button (push button) 25 ) To detect. A plurality of points are provided on the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, and a touch sensor provided on the touch panel 29 detects a touch operation on the points provided on the top surface of the effect operation unit 550.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” are provided as the plurality of points. More specifically, the "TSW4" point provided at the center of the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, the "TSW1" point provided to the left of the "TSW4" point, and the back side of the "TSW4" point The "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side, the "TSW6" point provided on the right of the "TSW4" point, and the "TSW8" provided on the near side (player's side) of the "TSW4" point Points, "TSW2" points provided between "TSW1" points and "TSW3" points, "TSW5" points provided between "TSW3" points and "TSW6" points, and "TSW6" Between the "TSW7" point provided between the point and the "TSW8" point, and between the "TSW8" point and the "TSW1" point And "Pa" point, which is provided, is provided. The number of points is not limited to nine and can be arbitrarily changed. Further, in FIG. 5B, for convenience, each point of “TSW1” to “TSW8” is described as “TSW1” to “TSW8”, however, in the rendering operation unit 550 of this embodiment, FIG. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

  The points at which a touch operation can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29 are eight points of “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, and the touch operation is not detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the touch operation may be detected even at the “Pa” point. In addition, at each of nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” points and “Pa” points, LEDs (systems of full color in the case of the present embodiment) of independent systems are arranged.

  The “Pa” point is, for example, using the “Pa” point LED as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or sequentially turning on the LED at each point on the top of the effect operation unit 550 like a roulette “Pa” point It can be used for the production of a definite system, such as using the LED of the “the exact (or definite variation confirmed)” point, and using the “Pa” point the LED for the accurate pre-reading.

  Here, the lighting brightness of the LED for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (specifically, the LED disposed at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” point, “Pa” point, etc.) is adjusted to the brightness (hall setting) , And player adjustment) are excluded from the subject. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor has a function of forcibly turning off the touch when the touch on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)). Has a function of outputting a signal. That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured to be unable to detect a continuous touch operation for a predetermined time or more.

  Examples of the operation of the player detected by the effect operation unit 550 include an operation shown in FIG. 5C. The “single hit” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 once, and the “continuous hit” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 a plurality of times at intervals within a predetermined time. The “long press” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 for a predetermined time or more, and the “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29. "" Pa "operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press" is in contact with one or both of "Pa" point or two points "TSW1" point and "TSW8" point adjacent to it. “Flick” is an operation of sliding so that the user touches the touch panel 29 while the user is touching it. Of course, the operation to be detected is not limited to these operations.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the outflow 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 flows into the gaming area 32 Discharged from And, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, the number of the number according to the type of winning opening won. The winning balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 6) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6) including a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34. When the gaming ball driven into the area 32 passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the common drawing variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game is already played and the common drawing fluctuation display game is not ended, or the common drawing fluctuation display game hits When 37 is converted to the open state and the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing start memory number is added if the common drawing start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) By 1), one common figure starting memory is stored. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 55 of the batch display device 50. Further, a random number value (hit random number value) for hit determination for determining the result of the common pattern variation display game is stored in the common drawing start memory, and the hit random number value is determined as the hit value. And determine the result of the general drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is provided on the collective display device 50, and is displayed on the fluctuation display unit (general drawing indicator) 52 configured by the LED, and the lighting mode and lighting color of this LED are ordinary Make identification information (general drawing, normal symbol). Note that the general-purpose display 52 is configured as a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may. If the stop display of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a common drawing specification result, it becomes a hit of the common drawing, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened for a predetermined time. Thereby, the game ball easily wins the second starting winning opening inside the normal variation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special view variation display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are each provided with a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 3 provided therein. It is detected by the switch 97a and the start opening 2 switch 37a. The gaming ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball for the first special view variation display game, and is stored as a first starting memory within a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected as the start winning ball of the second special view fluctuation display game, and is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as the second start memory. Is stored in In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random value is within the gaming control device 100 (see FIG. 6). The special map storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special map start storage within a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). Then, the number of storages of this special view start storage is displayed on the storage display unit (special view 1 suspension display 53, special view 2 suspension display 54) for the start winning number notification of the collective display device 50 and the center The display device 41 of the case 40 is also displayed as a decorative special view start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is a special figure 1 display 51a (variation display device) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or their start memory. Alternatively, the first or second special view variation display game is played on the special view 2 display 51b (the variation display device). The first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figure, identification information) and then displaying a predetermined result mode as a stop. Further, a decorative special-figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device (image display device) 41 is executed. Then, when the display mode of the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b becomes the special result mode (special result) as a result of the special view variation display game, it becomes a big hit and the special gaming state ( It becomes so-called, the big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, while performing the variable display game by the decoration special symbol corresponding to the special drawing start memory number, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  The special view 1 display 51 a and the special view 2 display 51 b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 a and the special view 2 display 51 b in the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening) is possible in a state where the first special view changing display game (second special view changing display game) can be started and the number of starting memories is 0. When the gaming ball wins in 97 or the normal variation winning device 37), the starting memory is stored along with the generation of the starting right, and the number of starting memories is increased by one, and immediately after the starting memory, the first special The figure variation display game (the second special figure variation display game) is started, and at this time, the number of starting memories is decremented by one. On the other hand, the first special view variation display game (second special view variation display game) can not be started immediately, for example, the first or second special view variation display game is already played, and the special view variation display game is ended. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) when the player is not in the state or in the special game state, the number of starting memories is the upper limit number If less, the number of starting memories is incremented by one and one starting memory is stored. Then, when the number of starting memories becomes 1 or more, the first special view variation display game (the second special view variation display game) can be started (the previous special view variation display game is ended or in the special gaming state) When the end is reached, the number of starting memories is decremented by one, and the first special view variation display game (the second special view variation display game) is started based on the stored starting storage. In the following description, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  In addition, although it does not specifically limit, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the 1st starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 3 switch 97a in the 2nd starting winning opening 97, the starting opening 2 switch in the normal fluctuation winning a prize apparatus 37 37a, gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38a, a coil for detecting magnetism is a noncontact type that detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil Magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and Special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure variation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current gaming state, the current game Select one of the variation pattern tables from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operating condition (time saving operation condition (general power support condition)) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the condition, the number of starting memories, etc. Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, the gate switch 34a in the common view starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, these switches An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which is supplied with a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from the circuit and is converted to a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a are second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. 7.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the rendering device 44 (for example, a movable combination that enhances the rendering effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. Also good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in the table to determine the hit-off of the common drawing fluctuation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the regular drawing display 52, processing is performed to display a regular drawing fluctuation display game which is stopped and displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit, the common drawing display 52 displays special result modes corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, and the common current solenoid 37c is displayed. In operation, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display 52.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in 1st starting winning a prize opening 36, on the basis of this starting memory, 1st special figure fluctuation indication A process of determining the hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed by extracting a random number value for the big hit determination of the game and comparing it with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 2 switch 37a which is equipped to normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 and starting opening 3 switch 97a which is equipped to 2nd starting winning a prize opening 97 remembers starting memory, Based on the starting memory, the random number value for the big hit judgment of the second special figure fluctuation display game is extracted, it compares with the judgment value which is remembered in ROM 111B, it does the process of judging the hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game .

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (rendering control command) including the determination result of the first special view variation display game or the second special view variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b, processing is performed to display a special view fluctuation display game in which the stop display is performed. That is, the game control apparatus 100 is a variable display game based on winning on the starting winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32. It constitutes game control means to control the progress.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b, and generates the special gaming state. Do the process of In the processing for generating the special gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A performs control to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, and to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. . Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines the time saving state (also referred to as a specific gaming state, a common drawing high probability state, and a general power support state) as a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. It is possible to occur. In this short time state, the probability (the probability per common drawing) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (generally drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) It is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state.

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability (the probability per common drawing) to be hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 0/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a high probability (generally high probability state, eg 250/251).

  In the time reduction state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power open times, the common power open time, and the common drawing probability. Make the time for state change longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. The device can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17), If normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 9 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  Further, it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17; N or step S18). N: If it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 9 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  In step S21 of FIG. 9, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time ( For example, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of RAM initialization with light and sound for 30 seconds) are transmitted.

  In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) Save a specific area of RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number which determines hit of common drawing (hit random number), random number which determines hit symbol of common drawing (touch symbol random number) From step S33, the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock at a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, the big hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing unit timer interrupt It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, in per random number, in per design random number, adopting the so-called “initial value change method” which changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of random number There is. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by the hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, set the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus (step S36), It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 11 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number updating process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), and the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common view variation display game, and “the first hit random number symbol” is a random number that determines the stop symbol for the common view variation display game It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c).
Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed. Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a Also, a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to monitor errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122), and the read input port 1 state is saved in the switch control area 1 in RWM ( Storage) (step S123).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 122) are as follows.
<1> Glass frame open detection switch 63 (bit 0)
<2> Main unit frame open detection switch 64 (bit 1)
<3> RAM initialization switch 112 (bit 2) (used in this process)
<4> Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3) (used in this process)
<5> Dispensing error status signal (bit 4)
<6> Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 5)
<7> Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
<8> Touch switch signal (bit 7)

  Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Are prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 123) are as follows. The switch monitored by the input port 2 has no inverted bit.
<1> Starting opening 2 switch 37a (bit 0) (Also output as "Starting opening 2 winning signal" and "Normal electric combination 1 winning signal 1" by the pattern branch)
<2> Start opening 1 switch 36a (bit 1) ("Start opening 1 winning signal")
<3> Left winning opening switch (bit 2) ("normal winning opening 1 winning signal")
<4> Right winning opening switch (bit 3) ("normal winning opening 2 winning signal")
The “left winning opening switch” is a winning opening switch 35 a provided on the left side of the winning device 90, and the “right winning opening switch” is a winning opening switch 35 a provided on the right of the winning device 90.
<5> Gate switch 34a (bit 4) ("Normal signal 1 related to gate passing signal 1")
<6> large winning opening switch 38a (bit 5) ("special electric role 1 winning signal 1")
<7> Starting opening 3 switch 97a (bit 6) ("Starting opening 3 winning signal")
<8> Not used (bit 7) (The circuit is connected to a relay board (not shown) as a gate switch spare, and is fixed to GND connection (Low: 0) on the relay board so as to be always off.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 124) are as follows.
<1> Board radio wave sensor 62 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
<2> Switch error detection signal (bit 1)
<3> Magnetic sensor 61 (bit 2)
<4> Frame radio error signal (bit 3)
<5> Payout busy signal (bit 4)
<6> unused (bit 5 to 7)

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Moreover, although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, there is a possibility that they may be data of the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state of the target switch control area is entered. Save (store) (step S144). Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state of the target switch control area ( The first data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit in the other is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), and the logic between the definite bit pattern and the port input state (second data) The product is taken, and it is set as the decided bit this time (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the previous reading result. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has changed. However, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the collective display (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the common power solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S166).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In this embodiment, when the digit counter value is 0, the digit line and segment line of the special view 1 display 51a are selected, and when the digit counter value is 1, the digit line of the special view 2 display 51b is selected. And segment lines are selected. Also, when the digit counter value is 2, the digit line and segment line of the general display 52 are selected, and when the digit counter value is 3, the special view 1 reserve display 53, the special figure 2 reserve display Digit lines and segment lines of the display 54, the right-handed notification unit 56, the short time condition notification unit 57, the probability condition display unit 58, and the round display unit 59 are selected. As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 "data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S170), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 Then (step S176), the output process is finished.

The output data of the segment line corresponding to each digit line is set in the segment area for each display provided in the RAM 111C (RWM) in the process described later. Specifically, it is set in the symbol variation control process (see FIG. 51) in the special view game process shown in FIG. 25 and the common-play game process shown in FIG. 53, and the segment LED editing process shown in FIG.
Since all of these processes are performed in one timer interrupt process, output data corresponding to all the segment lines is set in the segment area in the RAM 111C regardless of the value of the digit counter. Then, among the output data of the segment lines set in this manner, the output data of the segment lines corresponding to the value of the digit counter of this time is selected and used.
Further, as described above, the RAM 111C can hold stored data even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped. The segment area for storing output data of segment lines in the RAM 111C and the area for storing the value of the digit counter are subject to checksum calculation in the checksum calculation process executed when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped. Is included in the Therefore, it is the target of the determination of the legitimacy performed when the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed. As a result, when the gaming machine recovers normally from the power failure, it is possible to restart the display of the batch display device 50 from the state at the time of the power failure.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition, the display related to the game controlled by the game control means (game control device 100) to control the game in an integrated manner and the game control means The display device includes a plurality of light emitting display units (a special display 1 display 51a, a special display 2 display 51b, a generic display 52, a special display 1 suspension display). Device 53, special view 2 suspension indicator 54, general drawing suspension indicator 55, right-handed alert unit 56, short time status alert unit 57, probability status indicator 58, and round indicator 59), and the game control means Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of holding data even when supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, and validity of predetermined data stored in the storage means when supply of power to the gaming machine is started Legitimacy to judge the sex The game control apparatus 100 is configured to restart the game based on the data stored in the storage unit when the legitimacy determination unit confirms the legitimacy, and executes the game at predetermined intervals. In the timer interrupt, the digit counter which is information for selecting the common line (digit line) of a plurality of light emitting display units is updated, and dynamic control is performed to output segment data according to the value of the digit counter to the display device. The display control of a plurality of light emission display units is performed, and in the timer interrupt processing, all of the segment data corresponding to each common line are generated regardless of the value of the digit counter and stored in the storage unit. Only the segment data corresponding to the value of the digit counter is used from the inside, and the validity determination means is The predetermined data to sex determination target, and thus contained all the segment data corresponding to each common line stored in at least the storage means.
Therefore, since the predetermined data to be judged as the validity of the validity determination means includes all of the segment data corresponding to each common line stored in the storage means, the supply of power to the gaming machine is When it is started, the game can be started from the state where the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the display of the fluctuation display game without discomfort can be made.

Further, the game control means can execute a plurality of types of variable display games (first special view variable display game, second special view variable display game, common drawing variable display game) having different start conditions, and the display device is A plurality of light emitting display units including a plurality of light emitting units are provided corresponding to each of a plurality of types of variable display games, and the plurality of light emitting display units correspond to different common lines.
Therefore, the game can be started from the state where the supply of the power to the gaming machine is stopped when the supply of the power to the gaming machine is started in any of the plurality of types of variable display games, and the fluctuation display without a sense of discomfort The game can be displayed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.
The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).
The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.
The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.
As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to any reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.
Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special) provided in the game area 32 The game control means (the game control apparatus 100) which transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 38), and the payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means And the gaming control means is a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. Control to transmit the winning ball command to the payout control means based on the above, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the blackout, a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control means If Also, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the prize ball is displayed in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output for a predetermined period. The command is to be sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas (a first start winning port 36, a second starting winning port 97, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a general winning hole 35, a special fluctuation winning device 38) having different winning balls The control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of specifying presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command for instructing payout control of gaming balls for each number of prize balls. When the signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200). The status signal indicates that whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control is performed prior to the identification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter. It will be

  In addition, game control is generally performed, and a game to a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a winning ball command based on the winning of a ball, and a payout control means (payout control) for performing payout control of the gaming ball based on the winning ball command transmitted from the game control means And the gaming control means indicates that the status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when there is, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined winning area Prize ball signal External information output means (game control apparatus 100) for outputting the prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the This means that the winning ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the control can be started.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 97, a normal fluctuation winning apparatus One winning ball command is generated when a winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning on 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variation winning device 38), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (the game control device 100) can store the information of the winning on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area Yes, given The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in the prize area at the time of winning, and updating the game ball in response to transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means. The information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter can store information on winnings in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates the game ball at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, as well as external information By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213), and it is determined whether or not the random number per block is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (Step S214).

  If the hit random number in the drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216), and the hit symbol random number waits for the next initial value (start value) setting It is determined whether there is any (step S217).

  If the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number of the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the next time initial value is loaded and the initial symbol random number is loaded (step S218). The next initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when “2” The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing DRAM etc. In addition, although the counter "M1 counter" which operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( The process proceeds to step S239). The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). The data is saved in a lower random number area of byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A is configured to display the special view fluctuation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the start region of the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 97 and the normal change winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation aspect (variation pattern) is provided.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the high winning opening Even though the key is not open, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether the prize winning opening has an illegal prize and to detect a normal prize.
After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an incorrect winning and normal winning is achieved. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) to detect is performed.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (left winning opening switch, right winning opening switch) ) Is prepared (step S307), a winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed, and a starting hole error monitoring process (step S309) is performed.

Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the present monitoring is updated (step S310). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S312) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S313). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S314) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal It is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S315). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S315; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S315; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S316), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S317) is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S318) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S316 to S318 is performed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is performed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S316 to S318 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 20 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two big winning opening switches 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. The detection of winnings is easy for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening and closing members are forcibly opened to insert the game balls and the award balls are paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S 322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the large winning hole switch 38a, and the winning hole switch for error monitoring is started In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (Step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (Step S332). If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done.
For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (Step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (Step S330). In the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table) prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, lower address of fraud monitoring information The lower address of the illegal prize number area, the illegal prize error notification command, the illegal prize number upper limit value (incorrect judgment judgment number), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. .
If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrences (step S326). (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning hole switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 38a. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the fraudulent notification about the special variation winning device 38, and it is prevented that time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S336) and set the fraud recovery flag as a fraud flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step S340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step S 342), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 21 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352). In the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table) prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, a monitoring switch bit for each switch in addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches), Information of the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined.

  If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When no overflow occurs (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (disbursement command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S 359). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Starting mouth error monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the starting opening error monitoring processing (step S309) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. In this starting opening error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening 1 switch 36a (step S371). When it is determined that there is no input to the start port 1 switch 36a (step S371; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 3 switch 97a (step S375), and there is an input When it is determined (step S371; Y), it is determined whether the previous winning is also a winning to the first starting opening (first start winning opening 36) (step S372).

In step S372, when it is determined that the previous winning is also a winning to the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step S372; Y), that is, the game ball is the first starting winning in the winning device 90 When the opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 are not alternately distributed, the value of the continuous winning number area is updated by +1 (step S 373), and the value of the continuous winning number area is the upper limit value (this embodiment). In the case of, it is determined whether or not four or more (step S 374). When it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is equal to or more than the upper limit (step S 374; Y), the process proceeds to step S 379, and the value of the continuous winning number area is determined not to be equal to or more than the upper limit. In (Step S 374; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 3 switch 97 a (Step S 375).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S372 that the previous winning is not the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step S372; N), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area ( Step S384) Save the starting opening 1 winning combination information in the starting opening determination data area (step S385), and determine whether there is an input to the starting opening 3 switch 97a (step S375).

If it is determined in step S375 that there is no input to the starting opening 3 switch 97a (step S375; N), it is determined whether the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 375 that there is an input on start opening 3 switch 97 a (step S 375; Y), it is determined whether the previous winning was also the third starting opening (second start winning opening 97). (Step S376).

  When it is determined in step S376 that the previous winning is also a winning to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step S376; Y), that is, the gaming ball is the first starting winning in the winning device 90 When the opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 are not alternately distributed, the value of the continuous winning number area is updated by +1 (step S377), and the value of the continuous winning number area is the upper limit value (this embodiment). In the case of, it is determined whether or not four or more (step S378). If it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is not the upper limit value or more (step S378; N), it is determined whether the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388) and the value of the continuous winning number area is If it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (step S378; Y), the process proceeds to step S379.

In step S379, the value of the continuous winning number area is kept at the upper limit (step 379).
Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the starting opening error notification timer area (step S380), an error occurring flag is saved in the starting opening error flag area (step S381), and a starting opening error occurring command is prepared. (Step S382), effect command setting processing (step S383) is performed, and the starting opening error monitoring processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S376 that the previous winning is not a winning to the third starting opening (the second starting winning opening 97) (step S376; N), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area ( Step S386) The starting opening 3 winning combination information is saved in the starting opening determination data area (step S387), and it is determined whether the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388).
If it is determined in step S388 that the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388; Y), the starting opening error monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S388 that the starting opening error notification timer is not 0 (step S388; N), the starting opening error notification timer is updated by -1 (step S389), and the starting opening error notification timer is 0 It is determined whether or not (step S390).

If it is determined in step S390 that the starting opening error notification timer is not 0 (step S390; N), the starting opening error monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S390 that the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S390; Y), the normal middle flag is saved in the starting opening error flag area (step S391). Are prepared (step S392), rendering command setting processing (step S393) is performed, and the starting opening error monitoring processing is ended.
In the winning device 90, the game balls are configured to be alternately distributed to the first starting opening (the first starting winning opening 36) and the third starting opening (the second starting winning opening 97). In the case of winning continuously in the starting opening, there is a possibility of a failure in the winning device 90 or an incorrect winning due to a fishing line or the like, so in the starting opening error monitoring processing, it is checked. In this embodiment, an error is treated when the same starting opening is won four times in a row.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 23 shows gaming machine state check processing (steps S312, S314, and S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S401), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S402).
Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S402; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S403), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S404). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S405), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S409). If the target signal is not on (step S402; N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S402; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S406), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S407). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S408), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S409). When the target signal is on (step S402; Y), it is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect) in the error signal, and the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S409; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S412) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S409; N), ie, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ((step S409) Step S410). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S411), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S412), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S413).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. When the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by −1 and the comparison value is held at the value of −1 (step S414). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S415).

  Then, if the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S415; Y), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S415; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S416), and the rendering command setting process is performed. The process is then performed (step S417), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S404 or the state on command prepared in step S407 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 24 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, it is determined first whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S421). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S421; Y), a busy status flag is prepared as a status flag (step S422), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S423) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S421; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S424), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S425). ), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S426; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S427), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S428), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S429). If the value in the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S429).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S423 or step S425 (step S430), and if it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S430; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S430; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S431), and prepared in step S422 or step S424. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S432), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by
In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 97a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the display of the special view are performed.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 have a game ball prize, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted and In the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game result prior determination which determines in advance the game result based on the winning is performed.
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.
If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.
If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51a (step A15), the symbol variation control process (step A16) according to the special view 1 display 51a is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 51b (step A17), the symbol variation control processing (step A18) concerning the special figure 2 display 51b is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A15 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the jackpot is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is left hitting the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first start port (first start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A109), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y) It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In step A113, when the number of incorrect winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the determined number of fraud occurrences (for example, 5), it is determined that the fraud is in progress. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114), After the special view starting opening switch common process (step A115) is performed, the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that a common electric power fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A116), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when the target starting port switch (in this case, the starting port 3 switch 97a) has an input, the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning on the third starting opening (step A118; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning on the third starting opening (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general support) (step A119 ).

When it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is hit left to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 if it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a winning in the third starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (the second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special view start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, and A117) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (the first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (the normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting port (the second starting winning) Among the openings 97), the prize absence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A131), and the starting opening to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a It is determined whether there is an input on the switch (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.
If latch data exists in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A135). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening of the starting opening to be monitored The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the special view starting port switch common process, first, the number of winnings on the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, and starting port 3 switch 97a. Is loaded the number of times of starting opening signal output which is the number of times of outputting information related to the outside to the control device of the gaming machine 10 (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142) It is determined (step A143).
If the output number does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and saving is not performed.

Next, whether the number of to-be-updated special views (starting memory) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a is less than the upper limit It determines (step A145).
If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.
In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of special figures 1 or number of special figures 2) is updated by +1 Step A146), prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and start the starting opening winning flag Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A150), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110 and A117 is RWM. In the big hit random number storage area (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A153). The jackpot symbol random number is used in the special image reservation information determination process (step A157).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 2) are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A154).
Next, the address (one of places from 1 to 8) of the change order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is calculated (step A 155), and the calculated area is targeted The variation order flag of (Special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A156), the special figure reservation information determination process (step A157) is performed, and the special figure starting opening switch common process is ended.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A start storage means is provided which stores a predetermined number at the upper limit as a start storage which becomes the right of execution of the variable display game. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100), various random number values which are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 36 which is the starting mouth of the special figure 1 Various starting random numbers that are stored as starting memory and extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2, the second starting with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (step A157) in the special view starting opening switch common process described above will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 29, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and it is determined whether or not a big hit is determined by whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit decision value (big hit low probability decision value). A big hit determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether a big hit is set as a determination result (step A163).
If it is determined in step A163 that a big hit has been set as the determination result (step A163; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A164) and prepared in step A152 The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A163 that a big hit is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when outliers are set as the determination results, stop symbol information of the outliers is set (step A166). And the process of step A167.

At step A167, the stop symbol information acquired at step A165 or the stop symbol information set at step A166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Next, a prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing (step A169) is performed.
Next, a high probability judgment flag is prepared (step A170), and it is judged whether or not a big hit is a big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (big hit high judgment value) (step A171) To determine whether a big hit has been set as the determination result (step A172).
If it is determined in step A172 that a big hit has been set as the determination result (step A172; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A173), and prepared in step A152. The stop symbol information corresponding to the determined big hit symbol random number is acquired (step A174), and the process proceeds to step A176.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that a big hit is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, if outliers are set as the determination results, stop symbol information of the outliers is set (step A175), shift to the process of step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether the high probability of the special view is in progress (step A176).
If it is determined in step A176 that the high probability of the special view is not in progress (step A176; N), the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A176 that the special drawing is in high probability (step A176; Y), the stop symbol acquired in step A174 is stored in the symbol information area in which the symbol information is saved in step A167. The information or the stop symbol information set in step A175 is overwritten and saved (step A177), and the process proceeds to step A178. The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching of variation patterns and the like.

In step A178, a prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and effect command setting processing (step A179) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 transmits the result of determination by the big hit low probability determination value and the result of determination by the big hit high probability determination value each time the special view pending information determination process is executed Be done.
Next, special figure information setting processing (step A180) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A181).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number indicating the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special drawing fluctuation display game is prepared (step A182), rendering command setting processing is performed (step A183), End the process. The special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

With the above process, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special view change display game based on the start storage of the preread target and the read change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special view change display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.
That is, the game control apparatus 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start winning storage means (game control apparatus 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether a special result is obtained Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the pre-read big hit determination process (steps A162 and A171) in the above-mentioned special view suspension information determination process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 30, in the pre-read big hit determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A191), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192).

If it is determined in step A192 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; Y), the determination result is set as the determination result (step A197), and the prefetch big hit determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A192 that the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; N), it is determined whether the determination flag prepared immediately before the pre-reading big hit determination processing is the high probability determination flag Step A193).

If it is determined in step A193 that the flag is the high probability determination flag (step A193; Y), that is, if the prefetching big hit determination process is the process of step A171, the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set ( Step A194) It is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A196).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A193 that the flag is not the high probability determination flag (step A193; N), that is, if the prefetch big hit determination process is the process of step A162, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set. (Step A195) It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A196).

When it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196; Y), a release is set as the determination result (step A197), and the prefetch big hit determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A196; N), that is, a big hit, a big hit is set as the determination result (step A198) The read ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . If the special winning opening is being processed (step A201; Y), it is determined whether the special winning opening switch 38a has an input (step A203). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).
If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 38a (step A203). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A202; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.
Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

When it is determined in step A203 that there is no input to the special winning opening switch 38a (step A203; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A203 that there is an input on the special winning opening switch 38a (step A203; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A204), and a rendering command setting process (step A205) I do.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "4", that is, it is in the process of being open during the special winning opening open (step A206).

If it is determined in step A206 that the special winning opening is not being processed (step A206; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A206 that the special winning opening is being processed (step A206; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A207), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, nine) is reached or more (step A208).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A208; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A208; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A209), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether both the special view 1 reservation number and the special view 2 reservation number are “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flags are loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1) Then (step A302), it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303).
If it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation in special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decoration special figure reserve number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserve number is prepared (step A304), The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point in time, the special figure 1 pending number is not updated by -1, but at step A304, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the present fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the present fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, A decoration special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), a rendering command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, although the special figure 2 pending number is not updated by -1, in step A307, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether a customer waiting demo has been started ( Step A310) If the customer waiting demo has not been started (Step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (Step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, "0" is set as the processing number for the special drawing routine processing (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special drawing game processing number area (step A315), and the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared ( Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special view normal processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), first, save the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), (1) A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A327) is performed.
Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51a blink cycle timer) in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A332) For example, 100 msec is saved (step A333), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure change display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 change start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). 2) A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed.
Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 51 b blink cycle timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area For example, 100 msec is saved (step A353), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
FIG. 34 (a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 To do (step A363). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value is a big hit according to whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

  Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step A361 (step A366) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
FIG. 34 (b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value is a big hit according to whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result in the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the out information was saved in step A 371 (step A 376) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.
If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).
Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .
If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A391), and if it is a big hit (step A391; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A392). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A393), the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A394). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A395), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A396). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51a) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information (information showing 16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A397), and the stop symbol number The probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area (step A 398), and the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 401). Here, the probability fluctuation determination data is information indicating which mode to shift to after a big hit, and in the present embodiment, “low probability data (normal (without public support))”, “high probability” in step A 398 Data 1 (probability variation (with general power support)) or “high probability data 2 (latency probability variation (without general power support))” is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A391; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A399), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A400). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A402), and effect command setting processing (step A403) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A404) and clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A405). 1 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 change start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 411), and if it is a big hit (step A 411; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A412). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A413), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A414). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A 415), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A 416). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 51b) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information (information showing 16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A417), and the stop symbol number The probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area (step A418), and the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A411; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A419), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then (step A420), a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A422), and effect command setting processing (step A423) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A424), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A425). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 The variable display game execution means performs the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special view information setting process (steps A180, A324, A344) in the special view 2 change start process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special drawing information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A431), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the current probability state and the stop pattern pattern number is acquired (step A432). Here, in the present embodiment, as stop symbol pattern numbers, “0: Out of place symbol”, “1:16 R probability variation symbol”, “2: 6 R probability variation symbol A”, “3: 6 R probability variation symbol B”, “4: 6R probability variation symbol C "or" 5: 6R normal symbol "is set. In addition, “1: Normal (without PvP support)”, “2: Probability (with PvP support)”, or “3: Latency probability (without PvP support)” is set as the current probability state. .

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern number is “0”, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol pattern (step A433).
If it is determined in step A 433 that the stop symbol pattern is not dislocated symbol pattern (step A 433; N), the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A 432 is saved in the variation group selection pointer area (step A 435) The special drawing information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 433 that the stop symbol pattern is dislocated symbol pattern (step A 433; Y), the group corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number is selected The pointer is updated (step A434), the updated fluctuation group selection pointer is saved in the fluctuation group selection pointer area (step A435), and the special map information setting process is ended.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the distribution of the variation pattern does not affect the number of reservations, but when the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol pattern, the variation pattern is Allocation affects the number of reservations.
Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern and the current gaming state is normal (without power support) or latent probability change (without power support), the number of special figure 1 reservations and Special figure 2 The total value of the number of reservations is “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “ When it is 8 ", distribution of fluctuation patterns differs.
In addition, the stop symbol pattern is a disappointing symbol pattern, and when the current gaming state is a definite change (with general support), the total of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number is "1". The distribution of variation patterns differs between the occasions of “2”, “3” and “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” and “8”.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start process (steps A181, A326, A346) at the start of change will be described.
As shown in FIG. 39, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A441), and the address of the fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A442), The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) and prepared (step A 443).

Next, 2-byte distribution processing (step A 444) is performed to acquire the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution, prepare (step A 445), and target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A446).
Next, distribution processing (step A 447) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step A448), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 2 is cleared (step A451). Next, a fluctuation time value table is set (step A452), fluctuation time values corresponding to fluctuation pattern numbers are acquired, and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A453).

  Then, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A454), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A455). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A456), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A457). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A458), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A459). Next, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A460), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A461), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.
Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared (step A501), and effect command setting processing (step A502) is performed.
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A504). In the case of the present embodiment, 800 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, and 2000 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern.
Next, "2" according to the processing during special map display is set as the processing number (step A505), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A506).

  Then, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A507), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example Save the fluctuation signal (OFF)) in the test signal output data area (Step A508) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 509). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51a, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51a is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A510) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 51b as the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 51b (step A511), the special figure during fluctuation processing is ended.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process The big hit flag 2 which is set in the above is loaded (step A601), and a process (step A602) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A603), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A603; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal (for example, signal ON during condition device operation, signal ON during item continuous operation device ON, signal per special symbol 2) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 606), A round number upper limit table is set (step A 607).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A603 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 603; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A 604) and a big hit (step A604; Y) When it is determined, the test signal (for example, the condition device activation signal is ON, the bonus continuous operation device activation signal is ON) for the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A605), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A607).

  After performing the process of setting the number-of-rounds upper limit table (step A 607), the number-of-rounds upper limit (16R or 6R in this embodiment) corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information is acquired, and the number of rounds upper limit of RWM. Save to the value area (step A 608). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A 609).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A610), and effect command setting processing (step A613) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information that makes the probability of being hit in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A612). (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A614), and the effect command setting process (step A614) Do A615).

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 10000 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 616), and the big winning opening unfair winning of the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information. The number area is cleared (step A617), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region of the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information (step A618). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A619) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A 604 (step A 604; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the special view ordinary processing (step A 620), and the processing number is set to the special view game. The file is saved in the process number area (step A621).
Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A 622), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A 623), and the special view display processing is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A619) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, “3” for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A631), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing number Save to the area (step A 632).

  Next, save the signal regarding the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal, 2 big hit signals, 3 big hit signals, 4 big hit signals) in the external information output data area ( Step A 633), signals regarding termination of high probability state and short time state (eg, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2) The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A634). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A635), and a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A636). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A637).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A638), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 58) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The area is cleared (step A639), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A640). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery time transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A641). Save the designated signal 1 in the test signal output data area (step A 642), and turn on the right-turning display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 56). The number in the state of striking is saved (step A643), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A 701), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A 702). , Effect command setting processing (step A703) is performed.

Next, save the special winning opening open time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A704), and set it as "4" for the special winning opening opening processing as the processing number (step A705) The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A706).
Next, save a signal relating to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 707), and store the number of winnings to the special winning opening. The information on the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A 708). Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A709), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A801).
Then, if it is not the final round (step A801; N), an interval command relating to an interval between rounds is prepared (step A802), effect command setting processing (step A804) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A805.
On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A801; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A803), and effect command setting processing (step A804). ), And proceeds to the processing of step A805.

In step A805, the processing number is set to "5" for the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A805). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A806).
Then, save the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 807), and in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, the special winning opening solenoid 38b The off data for turning off is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A 808), and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A 901).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A 901; N), "3" is set for the fanfare / interval processing as the processing number (step A 902), and the processing number The file is saved in the processing number area (step A903).
Then, an interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 904), and a signal (for example, the special electric powered bonus 1) related to the opening end of the special winning opening The in-operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A905), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A 901; Y), set "6" for the big hit end process as the process number (step A 906), and process the process number to the special figure game process Save in the number area (step A 907).
Next, an ending time (for example, 5.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 908), and a signal (for example, a special motorized prize) related to the opening end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) 1) The operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A909).
Then, clear the information of the large winning a prize opening count number field which remembers the winning a prize number to the special winning opening (step A 910), clear the information of the round number field which memorizes the number of rounds of special gaming state (step A911), The information on the number-of-rounds upper limit area storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A912), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in this big hit end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed using probability fluctuation determination data (step A1001).
If the probability fluctuation determination data is "low probability data (normal (without general support))" at step A1001, a big hit end setting process 1 (step A1002) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1005.
In addition, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 1 (probable variation (with general public support))" in step A1001, the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1003) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1005. Do.
If the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 2 (latency probability change (without general support))" in step A1001, big hit end setting processing 3 (step A1004) is performed, and the processing in step A1005 is performed. Transition.

In step A1005, a probability information command is loaded from the power failure recovery transmission command area and prepared (step A1005). Then, an effect command setting process (step A1006) is performed.
Next, "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1007), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1008).
Next, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, big hit 3 signal OFF, big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1009), and the signal about big hit end (eg The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1010).
Next, clear the information of the probability determination flag area (step A1011), clear the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (step A1012), and during the fraud monitoring period in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region. The flag is saved (step A1013), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 48A shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1002) in the above-mentioned big hit end process. In this big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving state (for example, big hit 2 signal OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A 1021), and a signal regarding the start of low probability state and no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1022).

Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1023), save the general drawing low probability flag in the regular drawing game mode flag area (step A1024), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A1025).
Next, a signal relating to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1026), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to make it do, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1027).
Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1028), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 48 (b) shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A 1003) in the above-mentioned big hit end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the short time state (for example, 2 big hit signals ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1031). A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Then, the signal regarding the start with the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time reduction state signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1032).

Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1033), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1034), and in the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1035).
Next, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1036), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Big hit end setting processing 3]
FIG. 49 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1004) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this big hit end setting processing 3, first, a signal regarding no time saving state (for example, 2 big hit signals OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041), a signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1043), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1044), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The figure height probability & time saving none flag are saved (step A1045).
Next, a signal relating to a left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1046), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to cause the game, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the left hitting state (step A1047).
Next, the probability information command (latency) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1048), and the big hit end setting process 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 51 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A16 and A18) in the special figure game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the standard game game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the display table 1 (for fluctuation) on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A15, step A17 and step B14. An address is defined.

If the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A15, step A17 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is “0” (step A2105).

If the updated blinking control timer is not "0" (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.
If the updated blink control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the target blink timer area (step A2106), and the control target is controlled. The variation symbol number of is updated by +1 (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled is not fluctuating (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A15, step A17 and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 52 (a) shows the distribution process (step A447) in the fluctuation pattern setting process described above.
In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the data at the top of the selection table (the variation pattern selection table prepared in step A445) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201).
If the first data in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2207), and distribution processing is performed. Finish.
On the other hand, when the first data in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (Step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2) prepared in step A446 (step A2204), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and thereafter, the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2205. The random number value is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, any one variation pattern number is selected from at least one variation pattern number defined in the selection table (variation pattern selection table).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 52 (b) shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A444) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in step A 442) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A 2301).
Then, if the first data in the selection table (the variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution is performed. End the process.
On the other hand, when the first data in the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A443 (step A2304), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305, and a new disturbance is generated. A numerical value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

  The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 52 (a) and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 52 (b) are basically the same, but is the size of the random number used for distribution 1 byte? Because they differ in whether they are two bytes, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the common drawing game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, or The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Thereafter, after preparing a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 52 (step B14), symbol fluctuation control processing related to control of fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 52 ( Step B15) is performed to end the common-play game processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state (for example, during a big hit, during a special view time (under normal charge support)) is hit right .
When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) by acquiring the common drawing reservation number (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (step B105).

If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.
If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the common electric winning switch switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, if it is in the normal state (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202), and it is determined that the input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202) B202; Y) updates the count number of the common charge counter by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the post-update common charge counter is equal to or more than the upper limit (for example, 6) (step B204), and it is determined that the count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step B204; Y) ) Loads the hit end pointer value (“4” or “7” in the case of this embodiment) from the end pointer area per common drawing, and saves it in the middle control pointer area per common drawing (step B205). The process of step B205 is a process for closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37 based on the occurrence of the general electric winning of the upper limit value or more in the hit state of the general drawing.
Then, the common drawing game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the general electric winning switch monitor processing ends. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

  If it is determined in step B201 that a per figure drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the common charge count number is not the upper limit value or more (step B204; N), the common match winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the ordinary drawing routine, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y ) Sets “0” for ordinary processing as a processing number (step B 322), saves the processing number in the general drawing game processing number area (step B 323), and illegally displays the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area The flag is saved during the monitoring period (step B324), and the ordinary drawing routine processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) Clear the loaded area (that is, the per random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (step B302), and it will be a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game It is determined whether the probability is in the common high probability that is higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability in the common drawing), that is, in the short time state (step B303).

If the common drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the common drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the common drawing high probability is in progress (step B303) ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the per-random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B306). It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set (step B307).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the misplacement information (step B308), set the disappointing stop symbol number (step B309), save the disappointing symbol information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B310), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B314). In the present embodiment, two kinds of symbols ("I hit symbol 1" and "I hit symbol 2") are prepared as the hit symbols of the common drawing.

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”.
Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”.
Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the popular game processing timer area (step B320). In the case of the present embodiment, “500 ms” is set with a probability of 200/256, “1500 ms” is set with a probability of 40/256, and a probability of 16/256 as the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3. "3000 ms" is set.
Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B 321) is performed, and the general drawing routine processing is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 57 shows the processing shift setting processing (step B 321) during the common drawing fluctuation in the above-described common drawing normal processing. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, "1" associated with the common drawing fluctuating processing is set as the processing number (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B332) ).
After that, save the signal relating to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B333), and indicate that the common drawing fluctuation display game is changing. The flag indicating that it is changing is saved in the common drawing change control flag area (step B334).
Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing display 52, is saved in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B335). The initial value (for example, 0) is saved (step B 336), and the processing transition setting processing during common drawing is ended.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" related to the general drawing display processing (step B401), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area. (Step B402). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game in the common drawing display 52 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of common drawing is ended. A signal relating to (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404) and a stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is a common drawing fluctuation control flag area (Step B405), and the routine is finished.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the processing for displaying the generic drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503)
If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the ordinary processing (step B 515), and the processing number is saved in the common game processing number area (step B516) The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine monitoring flag period field (step B517), and the general drawing display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 "" And "5" are saved and saved in the control pointer area during the common drawing (step B505), and the value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4", "" corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information 7) is saved and saved in the end pointer area per common drawing (step B506). Next, a general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for the processing during the common drawing per processing (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B509).
Then, a test signal output (for example, a signal relating to the start of power operation) (for example, a signal relating to the operation of the ordinary electric symbol 1) is output. In order to save the data in the data area (step B510) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common power solenoid output data area (step B511).

Then, clear the information of the common charge count number area storing the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (step B 512), and store the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period. The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B513).
Next, a flag defining the fraud monitoring period out of the normal change winning a prize device 37 (traffic monitoring period out flag) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the general drawing display processing is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the common control pointer per loaded common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and Go and finish the process during the popular map.
Further, when the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the processing for setting the common power operation transition is performed without performing the processing of updating the control pointer in the common drawing in step B603. (Step B604) is performed to end the processing during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the general-purpose power operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned per-normal-period process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611). When the processing of step B 603 (processing of updating the control pointer by +1 during a common drawing) is performed, branch processing is performed according to the value before the update by +1.

  If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2", or "5", the process proceeds to step B612, and the normal fluctuation winning corresponding to the control pointer is performed to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. To save the wait time (for example, 300 ms) after blockade of the device 37 in the common game processing timer area (step B612) and turn off the common solenoid 37c, save the off data in the common solenoid output data area. Then (step B613), the routine operation shift setting process is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 614 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the normal charge open time (for example, 1700 ms) which is the open time in the normal game processing timer area (step B 614) and turn on the common electric solenoid 37c, save the on data in the common electric solenoid output data area. Then (step B615), the routine operation shift setting process is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B616 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so that it is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer. In order to save the general charge open time (for example, 2600 msec) in the general game processing timer area (step B616) and turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, save the on data in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B617) ), End the routine operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B618, and the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is ended to perform the general charge residual ball processing, so the processing number Is set as "4" (step B618). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B619), and the generalization residual ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B620). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B621), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the common figure stop symbol is “hit symbol 1” in the common figure high probability, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the common figure display. Then, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer in step B506 of the common drawing display processing, and "1700 msec" is acquired as the common power release time in step B507 of the common drawing display processing. Therefore, after the general drawing display time of 600 ms has elapsed, since the general power release time is "1700 ms", the general power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is opened for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer Because it is 0, a 300 ms wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “1” for each general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer for each general drawing is “2 The 300 ms wait time is set to be updated to “1”, and then the control pointer is updated to “3” for each normal drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer In order to be updated to “4”, the 600 ms common pressure residual ball processing time is set.

  In addition, when the common drawing stop symbol is “hit pattern 2” during the common drawing high probability, “5” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the common drawing display, and the common drawing is displayed In step B506 of the process, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the process of displaying the general drawing, "2600 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the general drawing display time of 600 ms has elapsed, since the general power release time is "2600 ms", the general power is released for 2600 ms, and thereafter, 300 m seconds since the control pointer is "5". Then, the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal drawing, and the general power is released for 2600 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "7", and the control pointer is updated to "7". The normal charge residual bulb processing time of second is set.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the generalization residual ball processing, first, “5” for end processing per general drawing is set as the processing number (step B 701), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (Step B702).

  Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B703), and a signal related to the operation termination of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (for example, the normal electric character 1 operation signal OFF) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B704), and the common charge count number area for counting the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B705). Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B706), and the end pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B707), and the general electric ball remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the end processing per common drawing, first, "0" relating to the normal processing is set as the processing number (step B801), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (Step B802).

  After that, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B 803), and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B804), and the end processing for the common drawing is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 suspension display 53, the special view 2 suspension display 54, the general drawing suspension indicator 55, the first gaming status display unit 56, and the second gaming status display provided in the collective display device 50 Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 57, the third gaming state display unit 58, and the round display unit 59 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output on timing is based on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 ms.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the common drawing reserve number display table 1 of the common drawing reserve number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reserve display 55 is defined is set. If it is not the output on timing (step S502; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (step S504).
Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area for the common drawing reservation display 55 provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special view 1 reserved with the display mode on the special view 1 reserve display 53 is determined. Of the number display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 is set. (Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special drawing 1 holding display 53 provided in the RAM 111C (step S509) .

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). When the output on timing is (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reserve display 54 is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set ( Step S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 2 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special drawing 2 holding display 54 provided in the RAM 111C (step S513) .
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 59 is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired from the set round display table, and provided in the RAM 111C. The data is saved in the segment area for the round display unit 59 (step S515).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 57 is lit to notify the occurrence of the time saving state (step S516). The display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired from the display table 1 and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 57 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 57 formed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during the special view time (during common power support).
After that, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the first gaming state display unit 56 for notifying that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting is set (step S518) Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired from the set game state display table 2 and saved in the segment area for the first game state display unit 56 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 57 consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, during general support). It is configured to light up.

Next, it is determined whether the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520).
If it is determined in step S520 that the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520; Y), the segment LED editing process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S520 that the on information is not saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520; N), the high probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 58) is turned off, The off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area for the third gaming state display unit 58 (step S 521), and the segment LED editing process is ended.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not time-up (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” are normal routes.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121 It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is turned on. When it is detected once, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not “0” −1 It updates (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the board radio wave illegal notification (step S 707), prepare a board radio wave illegality cancellation flag as the board radio wave illegality flag (step S 708), and the prepared board radio wave illegality flag It is determined whether the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area matches (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave illegal flag does not match the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S710), and the rendering command The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” are normal routes.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801).
If it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is not occurring (step S801; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S802), and the process of step S804 is performed. Migrate to
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S803). It transfers to the process of S804.

Next, if the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S804; N) or the main frame opening error is not occurring (step S805; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is set to the external information output data area. The data is saved (step S806), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S807), and the process proceeds to step S810.
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S804; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S805; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S808), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S810.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". (Step S810). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S811).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S811; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S812), step S813 Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S811; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S813 is not performed and the process of step S813 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), If the occurrence of a common electric power fraud is occurring (step S 816; Y) or if the starting opening error is occurring (step S 817; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is made the test signal output data area Then, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S820), and the process proceeds to step S821. If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S818; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area without performing the process of step S819 (step S820), and step S821 is performed. Transfer to processing of

  On the other hand, there is no magnet irregularity (step S 813; N), no board radio irregularity (step S 814; N), no big winning prize fraud (step S 815; N), even an occurrence of general electricity fraud If not (step S816; N), if there is no start opening error (step S817; N) or not even if frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step S818; N), the process of steps S819 and S820 is not performed. It transfers to the process of step S821.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S821) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S822) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 823). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S824).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is “0” (step S824; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then (step S825), the external information editing process is ended.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S824; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S826), end the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S821) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms). Of the time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S 836; Y), save the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM (Step S837), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S 836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by +1 (subroutine in payout command transmission processing) every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted), and updates (setting The main prize ball signal is output for the number of times the output is being output.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S822) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 97a are input.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The start opening signal output control timer initial value is the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the start opening signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time for the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) The on-state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting port signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". If the start opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S 846; Y), save the on data for turning on the start opening signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), the start opening signal editing process is ended. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described. Control processing by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes main processing shown in FIG. 71 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 71, processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared. Next, model release monitoring processing (step C8) is performed.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C8 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C9).
Next, effect button input processing (step C10) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect operation unit 550 (effect button 25 or touch panel 29). Reading of the input from the effect operation unit 550 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect operation unit 550, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

Next, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as setting of changeable range such as brightness of LED or liquid crystal, volume, etc., change of brightness of LED or liquid crystal, volume by player, enabling setting, etc. (Step C11).
Next, a random number updating process (step C12) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.
Next, a reception command check process (step C13) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control apparatus 100 is performed, customer wait demo editing process (step C14), model forced switching process (step C15), player model selection A process (step C16) and an effect point control process (step C17) are performed.

  Next, an effect display editing process (step C18) is performed to perform setting for controlling the progress of the effect and editing of the drawing command, and the preparation end of the drawing command is set (step C19). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem. The generation of the ambiguous screen (described later) is performed in the effect display editing process (step C18).

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C20). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C20 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C20; N), the processing in step C20 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C20 that it is the frame switching timing (step C20; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C21).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C22) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C22) for controlling the LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C23) A movable body control process (step C24) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C9).

[Model release monitoring process]
FIG. 72 shows the model release monitoring process (step C8) in the main process described above.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86A, for example, four different models such as “model A”, “model B”, “model C”, and “model D” are used. It is installed, and it is configured to be able to play these four models with one gaming machine. These four models differ from each other in the presentation mode of the game-related effects (not only effects performed during the game but also effects performed outside of the game (such as waiting for customers)).
Of course, the number of models of the models (hereinafter referred to as "mounted models") mounted on the gaming machine 10 is not limited to four, and a plurality of models can be appropriately changed.

The effects relating to the game are controlled by the effect control device 300. Specifically, the effect control device 300 is a display device (display device 41, sub display device 42, etc.), character object device (panel effect device 44, etc.) or decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, etc.) The game-related effects are executed using various effect devices such as the speaker device (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b, etc.).
In the effect mode of the effect using the display device (hereinafter referred to as “display device effect”), for example, the execution mode (variation pattern) of the decoration special view variable display game, the effect display (decorative special symbol, decoration hold display, The display mode of the character image, the background image, the customer waiting image, etc. is included. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), with "Model A", "Model B", "Model C" and "Model D", an ornament special symbol (identification information) or The appearances of the decoration holding display (decorative drawing start memory display) for informing the number of stored special drawing start memories are different from each other.
Further, the effect aspect of the effect using the character object device (hereinafter referred to as “character object device effect”) includes, for example, the operation aspect of the character object.
In addition, for example, a light emission mode such as an LED is included in the effect mode of the effect using the decoration device (hereinafter referred to as “decorative device effect”).
In addition, the effect mode of the effect using the speaker device (hereinafter referred to as “speaker device effect”) includes, for example, the type of BGM, and the like.

In the present embodiment, not all the installed models can be played from the first day of release of the gaming machine 10, but the number of models that can be played increases with the passage of time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the withdrawal of the customer attraction effect with the passage of time and to generate a new customer attraction means.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the "model A" and the "model B" are released from the first day of the release of the gaming machine 10 and can be played, and the "model C" is the gaming machine 10 One month after the release date of the game machine 10, the game is released, and the game becomes possible. The effect control device 300 is configured to set one model of the released mounted models (hereinafter referred to as “released models”) as a selected model, and to execute the rendering corresponding to the selected model in a normal state. ing.
Of course, the release date of each installed model can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the number of days from the release date of the gaming machine 10 is specified as the release date of the installed model, but the invention is not limited thereto. The day of introduction from the shop or the number of days from the press announcement date of the gaming machine 10 may be designated, or a specific day such as an anniversary may be designated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), in addition to being able to execute all of the effects corresponding to each of “Model A” to “Model D”, the effect control device 300 corresponds to “Model E”. It is possible to execute part of the production. The “model E” is a model scheduled to be released, a popular model with a request for remake from a user, or the like, and in this embodiment, such a model can be experienced in a limited manner.
Of course, the number of models capable of executing only a part of the corresponding effects such as "Model E" (hereinafter referred to as "not-equipped models") is not limited to one, and may be plural.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the model release monitoring process, first, the number of errors in the RTC 338 is cleared to 0 (step C31).
Next, date and time information is read from the RTC 338 (step C32), and it is determined whether or not normal date and time information has been received (step C33). Specifically, for example, the date and time information read in step C32 is compared with the date and time information already stored in the backup memory, and the date and time information read in step C32 indicates the past date and time. If there is, it is determined that normal date and time information has not been received. Also, when a communication error with the RTC 338 occurs, it is determined that normal date and time information has not been received.

If it is determined that normal date and time information has been received (step C33; Y), it is determined whether the power supply voltage of the RTC 338 is normal (step C34).
If it is determined that the power supply voltage of the RTC 338 is normal (Step C34; Y), the date and time information read in Step C32 is written to the backup memory (Step C35).
Next, release flags of "Model A" and "Model B" are set (Step C36), and a default model is set to "Model A" (Step C37). Here, the default model is a model that is set as a selected model at power on.
Next, it is determined whether the date and time to set the default model to "Model B" has been reached (step C38). Here, since "model A" and "model B" are released models from the first day of release of gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 86 (a)), the default model is set to "model A" from the first day of release. In the present embodiment, the default model is set to "Model A" in a predetermined period (for example, 15 days) from the first day of sale, and the model may be set to "Model B". After the lapse of time, the default model is set to "model B". Therefore, in step C38, if the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined that the date and time to set the default model to "model B" has been reached.

If it is determined that the date and time to set the default model to "Model B" has been reached (Step C38; Y), the default model is changed to "Model A" and set to "Model B" (Step C39), It is determined whether the release date and time of the “model C” (in the case of this embodiment, one month after the release of the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 86A)) has been reached (step C40).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the date and time to set the default model to "Model B" has not been reached (Step C38; N), the release date and time of "Model C" is reached without performing the process of Step C39. It is determined (step C40).

If it is determined that the release date and time of "model C" has been reached (step C40; Y), the release flag of "model C" is set (step C41), and the default model is changed to "model B""C" (step C42), and it is determined whether the release date of "model D" (in this embodiment, two months after the release of the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 86A)) is reached. (Step C43).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the release date and time of "model C" has not been reached (step C40; N), has the release date and time of "model D" reached without performing the processing of step C41 and step C42? Is determined (step C43).

If it is determined that the release date and time of "model D" has been reached (step C43; Y), the release flag of "model D" is set (step C44), and the default model is changed to "model C" It sets to D "(step C45), and it transfers to the process of step D46.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the release date and time of the "model D" has not been reached (step C43; N), the processing of step C46 is performed without performing the processing of step C44 and step C45.
At step C46, information on the default model (identification information for identifying the default model, etc.) is saved in the selected model information area (step C46), and the model release monitoring process is ended.
As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify the hall clerk or the player that the model has been newly released, the default model is set to the released latest model.
Since the effect control device 300 can not produce effects such as the display device effect unless it receives a command from the game control device 100, in the model release monitoring process, the release flag is set so that the released models can be determined. Or set the default model information so that the default model can be identified.

If it is determined that normal date and time information has not been received (step C33; N), or if it is determined that the power supply voltage of the RTC 338 is not normal (step C34; N), the number of errors in the RTC 338 is incremented by one. After updating (step C47), it is determined whether the number of errors is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, five times) (step C48).
If it is determined that the number of errors is not the predetermined value or more (step C48; N), the process returns to the process of step C32.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of errors is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step C48; Y), the RTC error flag is set (step C49) to immediately notify the RTC 338 that an error has occurred. , Setting of drawing of the RTC error screen (step C50). As a result, an RTC error screen is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.
Next, the release flags of "Model A", "Model B", "Model C" and "Model D" are set (Step C51), and the default model is set to "Model D" (Step D52). End the release monitoring process.
In step D52, the default model is set to "model D". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other default models can also be set.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes the predetermined result, the special game advantageous to the player can be executed. In the gaming machine, content setting means (effect control device 300) for setting any one of a plurality of contents (models in the case of the present embodiment) and contents (selected model) set by the content setting means And the effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing the effect corresponding to the release condition is set for each of the plurality of contents (see FIG. 86 (a)), and the content setting means It is possible to set any one of content (released model) satisfying release conditions among multiple contents, and release conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on. Of content, it is configured to set the content that satisfies the last release conditions.

  As a result, it is possible to switch the content (selected model) to be set within the range of the content (released model) satisfying the release condition, and to provide an effect corresponding to the content. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, regardless of the previous content setting state (that is, the selected model at the time of power off), the content that finally satisfies the release condition is set and effects corresponding to the content are performed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction attraction effect differentiated from other game machines.

The default model is a model with no release (hereinafter referred to as the "unreleased model") or an unequipped model, and when the power is turned on (especially when power is restored), the unreleased model or the unsupported model It is also possible to configure to display a predetermined screen (a customer demonstration screen, a variable screen, a big hit, etc. screen) displayed on the display device 41 or the like. That is, it is also possible to configure to execute the display device effect corresponding to the unreleased model or the not-installed model at the time of the power failure recovery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to raise again the interest that has fallen due to the power failure.
Of course, at the time of recovery from a power failure, not only the display device effect corresponding to the unopened model or the unmounted model is executed, but also the feature device effect corresponding to the unopened model or the unmounted model It is also possible to carry out.

[Hole / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 73 shows the hall / player setting mode process (step C11) in the main process described above. In the hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the hall setting mode in which information is set on the game arcade side is in progress (step C51). When the hole setting mode is in progress, the flag in the hole setting mode is set, and whether or not the hole setting mode is in progress can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag.
If it is determined that the hole setting mode is in progress (step C51; Y), the process proceeds to step C56.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the hole setting mode is not in progress (step C51; N), it is determined whether the player is in the player setting mode in which information is to be set (step C52). When the player setting mode is in progress, the player setting mode in-progress flag is set, and whether or not the player setting mode is in progress can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag.

If it is determined that the player setting mode is in progress (step C52; Y), the process proceeds to step C70.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the player setting mode is not in progress (step C52; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C53). Here, the start condition of the hole setting mode is, for example, that the effect operation unit 550 is pressed twice while the customer waiting state and the front frame 12 are open.
When it is determined that the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C53; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C54), and the flag in the hole setting mode is set (step C55) , Shift to the process of step C56.

In step C56, hall volume adjustment processing (step C56) is performed to set the changeable range of the volume based on the operation input.
Next, Hall LED luminance adjustment processing (step C57) is performed to set the changeable range of the LED luminance based on the operation input.
In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here.

Next, a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (step C58) for setting the liquid crystal brightness based on the operation input, and a power saving setting based on the operation input for setting whether to shift to the power saving state when the game is not performed for a predetermined time. A setting process (step C59) and a logo color setting process (step C60) are performed to set the display color of the frame decoration device 18 such as a logo provided on the outer side of the frame protrusion or the like based on the operation input. In the power saving setting process (step C59), it is set whether to enable the power saving setting when the game is not performed for a predetermined time. In addition to whether or not to shift to the power saving state, the volume, the LED brightness, and the liquid crystal brightness at the time of power saving setting may be set for each hole or each gaming machine. In addition to the above setting, it may be possible to set whether or not to operate the movable part during power saving.
Subsequently, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input for fixing the information set in these processes (step C61).

If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C61; N), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been input (step C61; Y), it is determined whether the setting operation input in factory shipment setting has been made (step C62). The determination operation input includes a determination operation input for determining the information set in the process from step C56 to C60, and a determination operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which is performed.

If it is determined that it is not the confirmation operation input at the factory default setting (step C62; N), that is, if it is the confirmation operation input to confirm the information set in the process from step C56 to C60, from step C56 The determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM as the information determined in the processing up to C60 as the determined information (step C64).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting operation input is the factory default setting (step C62; Y), the factory setting processing (step C63) is performed, and the information set in the processing from step C56 to C60 Are discarded, and the factory default value is determined as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM (step C64). As a result, the initial setting values (setting values such as volume, LED brightness, liquid crystal brightness, etc.) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323.
Then, the end of the screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C65), the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (step C66), and the hole / player setting mode process is ended.

If it is determined that the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step C53; N), it is determined whether the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step C67). Here, the start condition of the player setting mode is, for example, that the rendering operation unit 550 is pressed once during the wait for customers state in which the special view variation display game and the common view variation display game are not executed. .
If it is determined that the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step C67; N), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step C67; Y), the screen drawing start of the player setting mode is set (step C68), and the player setting mode flag is set. (Step C69).

Next, the player volume adjustment process (step C70) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C56), the change set in the hall LED adjustment process (step C57) A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C71) is performed to change the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the possible range. Next, the effect customization process (step C72) is performed to change the effect content based on the operation input. Thereafter, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C73).
When it is determined that there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C73: N), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been input (step C73: Y), the information set in the process of step C70, C71 or C72 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, and then the player setting mode is performed. The end of the screen drawing of is set (step C74), the player setting mode in-progress flag is cleared (step C75), and the hall / player setting mode processing is ended. As a result, the brightness, volume, and effects of the LED set by the player are changed.

Note that the drawing update setting according to the operation input after entering the hole setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C10).
In addition, since player setting data may be erased, it is not stored in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) but stored in the RAM 322, but may be stored in the FeRAM 323.
Furthermore, when the power is shut off, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 and stored in the FeRAM 322, and the power shutoff time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on, and player setting data stored in the FeRAM 323 according to the power shutoff time. Whether or not to store the hole setting value data may be determined. For example, when the power shutoff time is within the predetermined time, the hall setting value data is not stored in the player setting data and is maintained as it is, and the power shutoff for recovering a short time power failure or an error etc. In this case, the player setting data can be prevented from being reset.

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 74 shows the received command check process (step C13) in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C101), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C102). When it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C102; N), the received command check process is ended. If it is determined that the command reception number is not 0 (step C102; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the command reception number (step C103).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C104), and the command reading index is updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C105). It is determined (step C106). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C106 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C106; N), the process returns to step C104. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C106; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C107), and a received command analysis process (step C108) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C109), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C110). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C110; N), the process returns to the process of step C107. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C110; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 75 shows the received command analysis process (step C108) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C111), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C112, step C113). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C112; Y, step C113; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C114).

  If it is determined in step C112 or step C113 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C112; N, step C113; N), or if it is determined in step C114 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination ( In step C114; N), the reception command analysis process ends.

  If it is determined in step C114 that ACT with respect to MODE is a correct combination (step C114; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of variation system commands (step C115). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C115; Y), variation system command processing (step C116) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C115 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C115; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C117). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to a jackpot middle effect. Then, when it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C117; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C118) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C117 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C117; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C119). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). Then, when it is determined that MODE is a range of symbol system commands (step C119; Y), symbol system command processing (step C120) is performed, and the reception command analysis processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step C119 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C119; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C121). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is in the range of single-shot commands (step C121; Y), single-shot command processing (step C122) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C121 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C121; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C123). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C123; Y), pre-reading symbol system command processing (step C124) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C123 that MODE is not within the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C123; N), whether or not MODE is within the range of the pre-reading variation system command is determined (step C125). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (Y in step C125), the read variation command process (step C126) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C125 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C125; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 76 shows the one-shot command processing (step C122) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is for designating a model (step C131).
If it is determined in step C131 that MODE is for designating a model (step C131; Y), model setting processing (step C132) for setting the model is performed, and the one-shot system command processing is ended. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C131 that MODE does not designate a model (step C131; N), it is determined whether MODE instructs to initialize the RAM (step C133).

When it is determined in step C133 that MODE instructs to initialize the RAM (step C133; Y), the RAM initial processing for executing the processing corresponding to the power-on with the RAM initialization in the game control apparatus 100 A change setting process (step C134) is performed, a customer waiting demo command reception flag is set (step C135), a role position confirmation process (step C136) is performed, and the one-shot command process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C133 that MODE is not for instructing RAM initialization (step C133; N), it is determined whether MODE is for instructing restoration of a power failure (step C137).
In step C137, when it is determined that MODE instructs to restore power failure (step C137; Y), power failure recovery setting processing (step C138) for executing processing related to power failure recovery is performed, and single-shot system command processing is performed. Finish.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C137 that MODE is not for instructing recovery from a power failure (step C137; N), it is determined whether MODE is for instructing a customer waiting demo (step C139).

If it is determined in step C139 that MODE instructs a customer waiting demo (step C139; Y), it is determined whether it is a normal customer waiting demo command (step C140). Then, when it is determined that it is not a normal customer waiting demo command (step C140; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. Also, when it is determined that it is a normal customer waiting demo command (step C140; Y), the customer waiting demo command reception flag is set (step C141), and the bonus item position confirmation process (step C142) is performed to perform single shot. End system command processing. In the bonus item position confirmation process (steps C136 and C142), it is checked whether or not the bonus item is in the normal position, and if it is not in the normal position, setting for returning the position of the bonus item to the normal position is performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C139 that MODE is not for instructing a customer waiting demo (step C139; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the special view 1 suspension system (step C143).
In step C143, when MODE is determined to be in the range of the special system 1 suspension system (step C143; Y), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (step C.44), and the one-shot command processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C143 that MODE is not within the range of the special system 1 suspension system (step C143; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the special system 2 suspension system (step C145).

In step C145, when MODE is determined to be in the range of the special system 2 suspension system (step C145; Y), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process (step C. 146) to complete the one-shot command processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C145 that MODE is not within the range of the special system 2 reservation system (step C145; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of probability information system (step C147).
If it is determined in step C147 that MODE is in the range of the probability information system (step C147; Y), probability information setting processing (step C148) for executing processing such as setting of effects corresponding to the current probability state ) To complete the one-shot command processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C147 that MODE is not within the range of the probability information system (step C147; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of error / illegal system (step C149).

If it is determined in step C149 that MODE is in the range of error / incorrect system (step C149; Y), error / incorrect setting processing (step C150) for executing processing such as error notification etc. is performed, and single-shot is performed. End system command processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C149 that MODE is not within the range of error / illegal system (step C149; N), it is determined whether MODE is to instruct symbol stop (step C151).
If it is determined in step C151 that MODE is not for commanding symbol stop (step C151; N), the one-shot system command processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C151 that MODE is to instruct symbol stop (step C151; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C152).
If it is determined in step C152 that the command is not a normal symbol stop command (step C152; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. The symbol stop command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C152 that the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C152; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is performed (step C153), and if all symbols have stopped, the gaming state flag The normal state is set (step C154), and the one-shot command processing ends. The gaming state flag is a flag indicating the current gaming state, and in addition to the normal state, the gaming state flag includes a flag indicating a state such as during fluctuation or during a big hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation Ru.

[Design system command processing]
FIG. 77 shows symbol system command processing (step C120) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this symbol system command processing, first, the special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C161), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C162), and complete the symbol system command processing.

  A symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol type is a category of symbols such as a detached symbol, 16R positive variation big hit symbol, 6R positive variation big hit symbol, 6R normal big hit symbol etc, and is associated with ACT data . Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable system command processing]
FIG. 78 shows variable system command processing (step C116) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In the variable system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C171). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C161 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

  If it is determined in step C171 that the special drawing type is unconfirmed (step C171; Y), the variation system command processing is ended. When it is determined that the special figure type is not undecided (step C171; N), that is, when the special figure type is not set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C172). It is determined whether the command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C173). When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is performed as if the symbol command of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol was received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received. It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts with.

  If it is determined in step C173 that the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C173; Y), variation system command processing is ended. In addition, when it is determined that the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C173; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C174), and information for performing rendering according to the variation command The variation effect setting process of setting is performed (step C175). In step C174, in accordance with the received command, the fluctuation pattern type which is a rough classification of the fluctuation display effect of the special drawing is determined.

  Next, the special figure variation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C176). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Furthermore, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (step C177), the special figure fluctuation frequency is updated by 1 (step C178), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Change production setting process]
FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 show the fluctuation effect setting process (step C175) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 can execute the screen split reach change effect as one of the reach change effects.
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of display at the time of screen division reach fluctuation effect executed when all the four mounted models are released.
When the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is the screen division reach fluctuation effect, the effect control device 300 divides the display area of the display device 41 into a plurality of areas at the start of the change effect etc., and releases them in each area Execute reach variation presentation corresponding to the finished model.
In the case of the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 divides the display area of the display device 41 into four areas. Then, when all the four mounted models have been released, the reach variation effect corresponding to "Model A" is executed in the upper left area as the display device effect, and the "Model B" is supported in the upper right area. The reach change effect is performed, the reach change effect corresponding to “model C” is performed in the lower left area, and the reach change effect corresponding to “model D” is performed in the lower right area.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the case of the present embodiment, the effect time (the time from the start of the effect to the end of the effect) of the reach variation effect is set to be the same for all four mounted models. On the other hand, with regard to the timing at which a predetermined state occurs during reach variation production (the timing at which the left, middle and right decorative special symbols stop, and the timing at which reach effect starts (reach state occurs)), Some models are set to differ from installed models, and others are set to be identical to other installed models. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with a difference in timing for each model by simultaneously starting the reach variation presentation corresponding to each of the released models in the screen split reach variation presentation.
In addition, the rendering time of the reach change rendering corresponding to each of the mounted devices may not be set to be the same. For example, in the case where the presentation time of each reach change presentation performed during the screen split reach change presentation is different, the end timings will be different if each reach change presentation is started all at once. In that case, for example, a predetermined effect (for example, a swing fluctuation effect) in the middle of a reach change effect whose effect time is shorter than that of the reach change effect so that the reach change effect and the end timing coincide with the longest effect time. It is also possible to make adjustments so that the end timings of the respective reach variation effects coincide.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 87, the model name of the model corresponding to the area is displayed in the upper left part of each area, but if you want to hide the model name, replace the model name with "??? ", Etc. may be displayed.
Further, each reach change effect performed during the screen split reach change effect may have the same or different expectation (expected value).
In addition, during the screen division reach fluctuation production, it is basically to perform the production corresponding to the selected model as a character product device production, a decoration device production or a speaker device production, but a reach fluctuation with a different degree of expectation as a display device production When the effect is being performed, effects (a feature device effect, a decoration device effect, a speaker device effect) corresponding to a model that is performing the reach change effect with the highest degree of expectation may be performed.

Then, when the result is out, the effect control device 300 derives out results in all released models (specifically, areas corresponding to the released models).
On the other hand, if the result is a big hit, perform a big hit model lottery, select the model from which the big hit result is derived from the released models, and select the selected model (specifically, it corresponds to the selected model) Derive the jackpot result (special result) in the In the jackpot model lottery, only one model may be selected, or a plurality of models may be selected. In addition, it is basically to return to the state before starting the screen division reach fluctuation presentation (that is, the state to execute the presentation corresponding to the selected model) when the screen division reach fluctuation presentation ends, but in the big hit model lottery When the selected machine type is different from the selected machine type, when the screen division reach variation effect is finished, the jackpot effect corresponding to the model selected in the big hit machine type lottery is executed, and the screen is divided after the special gaming state is ended. You may return to the state before starting a reach change production | presentation.

It should be noted that the jackpot result may be derived for all of the released models without performing the jackpot model lottery.
Also, the jackpot model lottery may select a model from which the jackpot result is derived from the installed models (including the unreleased model), and when the unreleased model is selected in the jackpot model lottery The jackpot effect corresponding to the unreleased model may be executed. Also, the jackpot model lottery may select a model from which the jackpot result is derived from the installed models and the not-installed models, and when the not-installed model is selected in the big-hit model lottery, the not-populated model is not selected. You may carry out a big hit during the production corresponding to the mounted model. When executing a jackpot effect corresponding to the unreleased model or the not-equipped model, for example, if only a part of the jackpot effect is executed, the player can be made to think that he / she wants to see the whole jackpot effect concerned. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the unreleased models and the unequipped models, and it is possible to increase the gaming intention on the unreleased models and the unequipped models.
Further, in the present embodiment, during the target special view change display game (special view change display game with screen division reach change presentation), screen division reach change presentation is executed (screen division reach change presentation starts To complete the process, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the screen division reach fluctuation effect may be executed over a predetermined period including the target special view fluctuation display game, or the target The screen division reach variation effect may be executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games including one special figure fluctuation display game.

Furthermore, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, during the screen division reach variation effect, one of the two sub display devices 42 is disposed above the display device 41, and the other is the display device 41. It is arranged to the right of.
In the example shown in FIG. 87, in the upper left portion of the display area of the upper sub display device 42, a number indicating the number of reserved special views is displayed in the upper stage, and a number indicating the number of reserved special views 2 is displayed in the lower stage. It is done. Further, in the lower right portion of the display area of the upper sub display device 42, a decorative special view fluctuation display game corresponding to the special view 1 fluctuation display game or the special view 2 fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the number which shows the number of special figure 1 reservations, the number which shows the number of special figures 2 reservations, and the decoration special figure change display game may be always displayed on the upper side sub display apparatus 42, and screen division reach change You may move to the upper sub display apparatus 42 from the display apparatus 41 at the time of the start of production, and may return to the display apparatus 41 from the upper sub display apparatus 42 at the time of completion | finish of the said screen division reach fluctuation presentation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 87, in the sub display device 42 on the right side, the model name of the selected model (here, “Model A”), the character image and its name (here, “Tiger”) and its level (here) Information such as “Lv. 634” and the number of owned points (described later) for each mounted device are displayed.
The sub display device 42 on the right may display these information all the time, or only when the player wants to confirm (that is, only when receiving an operation input instructing to display the information) Also good. Of course, when performing an effect using the sub display device 42 on the right side, these pieces of information may be erased.
In FIG. 89 to FIG. 104 (except FIG. 98), for convenience, among the displays and display devices described in FIG. 87, displays and display devices unnecessary for explanation are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is fluctuation without reach (step C181). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C181; Y), set the pre-reach notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode, the character level, and the effect customization information Step C182). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. Further, the effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

  Next, with reference to the pre-reach advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the pre-reach advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE, the number of reserved special drawing types is acquired (step C183). Thereby, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it becomes possible to change the lottery contents (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) of the notice effect appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the pre-reach advance notice distribution group table is used to draw a notice for appearing during the pre-reach fluctuation (step C186).

  On the other hand, when the change pattern type is not reach no change (step C181; N), the pre-reach notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special view type, effect mode, character level, effect customization information, and symbol type Are set (step C184). Then, referring to the pre-reach advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the pre-reach advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C185), and the pre-reach advance notice distribution group table is used. A lottery for notice to appear during the pre-reach fluctuation is made (step C186).

  Next, in step C187 to step C189, the notice effect of the on-reach variation is drawn. Here, “reach fluctuation” is a special figure fluctuation display game executed after reaching the reach state (during reach state), that is, so-called reach actions (for example, a plurality of special figures In the special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding the specific area in the display area of the column is a big hit, the variable display is stopped and the variable display is performed in the specific area only) It is. On the other hand, the "pre-reach variation" is a special view variation display game executed before reaching the reach state, that is, a variation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, the in-reach advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, the character level, the effect customization information, and the symbol type is set (step C187). The during-reach notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the during-reach notice distribution group table. Then, referring to the in-reach notice distribution group address table, the address of the in-reach notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired (step C188), and appears in the reach using the in-reach notice distribution group table. A lottery for notice is made (step C189). In the case of no reach fluctuation, the result of the lottery in step C189 results in nothing appearing.

Next, the basic BGM (specifically, the basic BGM voice number) and the decoration number corresponding to the effect mode are set (step C190), and it is determined whether the change effect to be executed this time is the screen division reach change effect (Step C191).
If it is determined that the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is not the screen division reach fluctuation effect (step C191; N), the setting regarding the fluctuation effect to be executed this time (other fluctuation effects such as reach fluctuation effects other than the screen division reach fluctuation effect) To the process of step C206.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is the screen division reach fluctuation effect (step C191; Y), it is determined whether all the installed models of "Model A" to "Model D" are released ( Step C192).
If it is determined that all the installed models are not released (step C192; N), it is determined whether the "model C" is released (step C193).

When it is determined that the "model C" is released (step C193; Y), it is determined whether the "model D" is released (step C196).
On the other hand, when it is determined that "Model C" is not released (Step C193; N), the effect display to be displayed in the area corresponding to "Model C" (in the case of this embodiment, the lower left area) is determined. Make a lottery for making a game (step C194). Specifically, in step C194, a plain (blank) screen or a model C ambiguous screen in which the reach fluctuation effect corresponding to "model C" is displayed ambiguously as the effect display to be displayed in the area corresponding to "model C" And any one of the non-equipped model screens on which the reach fluctuation effect corresponding to the non-equipped model is displayed is determined.
Next, at reach time (during reach), setting for performing display corresponding to the result of the lottery in step C194 is performed (step C195), and it is determined whether “model D” is released (step C196).

When it is determined that "model D" is released (step C196; Y), setting for displaying released models at the time of reach (during reach) is performed (step C199), and the special view type is selected. It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation (step C206).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the "model D" is not released (step C196; N), the effect display to be displayed in the area corresponding to the "model D" (the lower right area in the case of this embodiment) is A lottery for determination is made (step C197). Specifically, in step C197, a plain (blank) screen, a model D ambiguity screen in which the reach fluctuation representation corresponding to “model D” is displayed ambiguously as an effect display to be displayed in the area corresponding to “model D” And any one of the non-equipped model screens on which the reach fluctuation effect corresponding to the non-equipped model is displayed is determined.
Next, make settings to perform display corresponding to the result of the lottery in step C 197 at the time of reach (during reach) (step C 198), and set to display the released models at the time of reach (during reach) Then (step C199), it is determined whether the special figure type is special figure 1 fluctuation (step C206).

If it is determined that all the mounted models are released (step C192; Y), it is determined whether the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is a big hit reach fluctuation effect (step C200).
If it is determined that the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is not a big hit reach fluctuation effect (step C200; N), that is, if the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is an outreach reach fluctuation effect, "model A" at reach (during reach) The setting for displaying the "model D" is performed (step C205), and it is determined whether the special figure type is the special figure 1 fluctuation (step C206).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is a big hit reach fluctuation effect (step C200; Y), a lottery is performed to determine whether to display the non-equipped model screen (step C201).

If it is determined in step C201 that the display of the non-equipped model screen is not displayed (step C202; N), the setting for displaying "model A" to "model D" at the time of reach (during reach) is made Then (step C205), it is determined whether the special figure type is special figure 1 variation (step C206).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C201 to display the non-installed model screen (step C202; Y), a lottery is performed to determine in which area the non-installed model screen is displayed (step C203). ). Specifically, in step C203, an area corresponding to "model A", an area corresponding to "model B", an area corresponding to "model C", and "model D" as an area for displaying an unsupported model screen. Or one or more of the other areas R1 are determined.
Next, at reach time (during reach), a setting for performing display corresponding to the result of the lottery in step C203 is performed (step C204), and it is determined whether the special figure type is special figure 1 fluctuation (step C206) .

When it is determined that the special figure type is the special figure 1 fluctuation (step C206; Y), setting for starting the fourth symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed (step C207), and the fluctuation effect is produced. End the setting process.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure type is not the special figure 1 fluctuation (step C206; N), that is, when the special figure type is the special figure 2 fluctuation, the fourth symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation is started The setting for setting is performed (step C208), and the variation effect setting process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the fourth symbol for executing the decoration special view fluctuation display game separately from the decoration special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the display of the number of start memories are configured If the fourth symbol is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in step C207 or step C208, the display setting on the display device 41 is set, and the fourth symbol on the screen of the sub display device 42 is set. Is displayed, the display setting of the sub display device 42 is performed, and when the fourth symbol is displayed by the LED, the display setting of the LED is performed.

In FIG. 89 (a), it is determined in step C194 that a plain screen is displayed in the area corresponding to "model C", and it is determined in step C197 that a plain screen is displayed in the area corresponding to "model D". An example of the display in the case of having In this case, since the number of unreleased models can be suggested by the number of areas in which the plain screen is displayed, the player can be loaded by the suggestion even if the player does not know the number of loaded models in advance. You can know the number of models. The color of the plain screen is not limited to white, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in FIG. 89 (b), when it is determined in step C193 that “model C” is released, and it is determined in step C197 that an unequipped model screen is displayed in the area corresponding to “model D”. An example of a display of is shown. In this case, the player can experience the non-equipped model in the area corresponding to the unreleased model.

In FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c), it is determined in step C193 that "model C" is released, and in step C197, the model D ambiguity screen is displayed in the area corresponding to "model D". An example of a display when it is determined is shown.
Specifically, the model D ambiguity screen is a screen in which a mosaic is applied to the entire image for reach variation effect corresponding to “model D”. In the example shown in FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c), the vague screen indicates a screen in which the degree of mosaic is weakened (a screen in which the amount of information obtained gradually increases) as the game progresses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the vague screen may be a screen having a constant mosaic degree regardless of the progress of the game (a screen having a constant amount of information obtained).
Since an image relating to an unreleased model that can not be played at this time is displayed on the ambiguity screen, the image is ambiguously displayed until the end. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she wants to see the video clearly displayed, so that he / she can be interested in the unreleased model, and can increase the gaming intention in the unreleased model. At the same time, it is possible to provide the player with new interest such as winning unreleased models and imagining and enjoying unreleased models. In addition, on an ambiguous screen, a background image may be displayed and mosaic may be applied including the background image, or the background image may not be displayed (the background is made plain) but the atmosphere of the whole screen It is preferable not to display the background image in order to prevent the contents of the image being displayed on the screen from being prematurely blurred.

Note that the ambiguity screen is not limited to a screen in which the entire video related to the unreleased model is mosaicked, and a screen in which the video is displayed ambiguously (with a limited amount of information obtained from the video). If it is, it is possible to appropriately change it, for example, it may be a screen in which a part of the video about the unreleased model is mosaiced, or a screen in which at least a part of the video about the unreleased model is filled It may be a screen on which an image of an unreleased model fades in. Further, in the ambiguity screen, it is not necessary to display all of the effect display (the decoration special symbol, the decoration holding display, the character image, the background image, etc.) appearing in the image related to the unreleased model.
Even when a screen where mosaic is applied to a part of the video concerning an unreleased model is displayed as an obscure screen, a screen in which the mosaic degree weakens with the progress of the game (a screen where the amount of information obtained gradually increases May be displayed, or a screen with a constant mosaic degree (a screen with a constant amount of obtained information) may be displayed regardless of the progress of the game.

The screen in which at least a part of the video related to the unreleased model is filled is, for example, a screen in which the area including at least the effect display appearing in the video is filled with a color different from the background color. When the screen is displayed as an ambiguous screen, a screen may be displayed in which the shape of the filled area changes as the game progresses, or the shape of the filled area regardless of the progress of the game There may be displayed a constant screen (a screen having a constant amount of information to be obtained).
When displaying a screen in which the shape of the area to be painted changes as the game progresses, it is preferable that the amount of information obtained from the screen gradually increases. For example, the shape of the area to be painted is the shape It may be changed so as to gradually approach the silhouette of the target effect display, or the shape of the area to be filled is made smaller, and the target effect display becomes gradually visible (a portion to be filled out of the target effect display Gradually decreases).
In addition, although the model C ambiguity screen is displayed in the area corresponding to “model C” and the model D ambiguity screen is displayed in the area corresponding to “model D”, the present invention is not limited thereto. The display position and size can be changed as appropriate.

Further, FIG. 89 (c) shows an example of display when it is determined in step C203 to display the non-installed model screen in the other area R1.
In the example shown in FIG. 89 (c), although the same size area as each area corresponding to the mounted models (“Model A” to “Model D”) is displayed as the other area R1, the other areas are displayed. The size of R1 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the size of the other area R1 may be the same size as the display area of the display device 41. In this case, only the non-equipped model screen is displayed on the display device 41.
In the example shown in FIG. 89 (c), apparently, the other area R1 is displayed on the front side of each area corresponding to the mounted model, but the display position of the other area R1 can be appropriately changed. For example, another area R1 may be displayed on the sub display device 42.

If the jackpot result (special result) is derived on the unequipped model screen, only the data for performing the big hit reach fluctuation effect among the data for performing the reach fluctuation effect corresponding to the not-equipped model is configured Since preparation is sufficient, the burden on development can be reduced and the amount of data can be reduced.
Furthermore, if it is configured to execute only the SP reach effect that characterizes the non-equipped model as the reach effect (during in-reach effect) to be executed during the reach variation production corresponding to the non-equipped model, the load during development or data Not only can the amount be reduced, but it also makes it possible to be interested in non-equipped models. In the examples shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the decoration hold display is extinguished on the non-installed model screen, but it is possible to display the decoration hold display on the non-installed model screen as a matter of course.

  In the case where all installed models are released and the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is a big hit reach fluctuation effect (step C200; Y), the processing in steps C201 to C204 is performed, but all installed models are Even when the variation effect to be executed this time is the out-of-reach reach variation effect (step C200; N), the processes of steps C201 to C204 may be performed. In this case, the process of steps C201 to C204 is performed instead of the process of step C205.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes the predetermined result, the special game advantageous to the player can be executed. In the gaming machine, content setting means (effect control device 300) for setting any one of a plurality of contents (models in the case of the present embodiment) and contents (selected model) set by the content setting means And effect control means (effect control device 300) for displaying an image relating to the content on the display device 41 by executing the effect corresponding to the, and a release condition is set for each of the plurality of contents ( Content setting means sets any one of contents (released models) satisfying release conditions among a plurality of contents (see FIG. 86 (a)). In the predetermined period (during a specific reach change in the case of the present embodiment), the effect control means can display a plurality of areas corresponding to the plurality of contents in the display area of the display device 41 (this embodiment). In the case of (4), it is divided into four areas, and in the area corresponding to the content satisfying the release condition, the video concerning the content is displayed regardless of whether or not the content is set by the content setting means. In the area corresponding to the content (unreleased model) which does not satisfy the release condition, the image other than the image related to the content is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to switch the content (selected model) to be set within the range of the content (released model) satisfying the release condition, and to provide an effect corresponding to the content. Furthermore, during a predetermined period (during a specific reach change), it is possible to simultaneously display an image relating to the content satisfying the release condition and to display an image other than an image relating to the content not satisfying the release condition . Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction attraction effect differentiated from other game machines.
In addition, during a predetermined period, it is not limited during specific reach change, and it can change suitably, for example, may be during change other than reach change, and may be during a big hit, It may be during a customer demonstration. That is, in the present embodiment, the screen division effect is performed as the reach change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change effect other than the reach change effect, the jackpot effect, the customer waiting demonstration effect It is also possible to configure to execute the screen division effect.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a blank image (plain screen (FIG. 89) in the area corresponding to the content (unreleased model) not satisfying the release condition. It is possible to configure so as to display an image (not-equipped model screen (see FIG. 89 (b))) regarding contents other than a plurality of contents or a plurality of contents).

With this configuration, it is possible to obtain information other than the information obtained from the video related to the content from the video displayed in the area corresponding to the content that does not satisfy the release condition.
Specifically, when a blank video (solid screen) is displayed, the number of contents (unreleased models) that do not satisfy the release condition can be obtained according to the number of areas in which the blank video is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the gaming intention for unreleased models.
In addition, when a video (unreleased model screen) regarding content other than a plurality of contents is displayed, it is possible to obtain information obtained from the video regarding the unequipped model, so that the gaming desire for the unequipped model can be increased. As well as being possible, even when there are many areas corresponding to the content (unreleased model) which does not satisfy the release condition, it is possible to give a satisfaction that the user can experience the unmounted model.

  If there are a plurality of areas corresponding to unreleased models, a plain screen may be displayed on any of the plurality of areas, and an unmounted model screen may be displayed on the remaining areas. Also, in this case, as the number of times the special view variation display game is executed in the specific mode increases, the area in which the plain screen is displayed is decreased (the area in which the non-equipped model screen is displayed is increased). good. Also, in this case, the player can customize the number of areas in which the plain screen is displayed and the number of areas in which the non-installed model screen is displayed by the number of owned points (described later) and password input (described later). Also good.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the area corresponding to the content (unreleased model) which does not satisfy the release condition, the amount of information obtained from the image related to the image related to the content is limited. It is configured to be displayed (in the case of the present embodiment, an ambiguous screen is displayed).

  As a result, it is possible to switch the content (selected model) to be set within the range of the content (released model) satisfying the release condition, and to provide an effect corresponding to the content. Furthermore, during a predetermined period (during a specific reach change), an image relating to the content satisfying the release condition is simultaneously displayed, and information on the image relating to the content not satisfying the release condition (unreleased model) is obtained from the image It is possible to perform an effect of displaying (displaying an ambiguous screen) in a state in which is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction attraction effect differentiated from other game machines.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is generated based on the image related to the content in the area corresponding to the content (unreleased model) not satisfying the release condition. It is possible to configure to display any one of the video which is at least partially mosaiced, the video which is at least partially filled, and the fade-in video.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to have an interest in the content by the video displayed in the area corresponding to the content (unreleased model) that does not satisfy the release condition.

Note that the type of video displayed as an ambiguous screen may be made different depending on the number of times the special view variable display game is executed in the specific mode.
Also, the player may be able to customize the type of video to be displayed as an ambiguous screen by the number of owned points (described later) or password input (described later).
In addition, as the vague screen, a screen in which the amount of information obtained gradually along with the progress of the game gradually increases, and a screen in which the amount of information obtained regardless of the progress of the game is constant May be a screen in which the amount of information obtained as the game progresses gradually decreases.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command for specifying the type of effect to the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided. Out of the storage means (the PROM 321 and the FeRAM 323 storing the information read from the PROM 321) for storing the presentation mode, the presentation of the presentation corresponding to the content (selected model) set by the content setting means (the presentation control device 300) Among the modes, the effect mode corresponding to the type of effect specified by the command from the game control means is acquired, and the effect is executed in the acquired effect mode.

  Thereby, if the content (selected model) set by the content setting means (effect control device 300) is different, the type of effect specified by the command from the game control means (game control device 100) is the same. Also, since the presentation mode is different, a wide variety of presentation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to carry out an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction attracting effect differentiated from other game machines.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect (in the case of the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation effect) executed by the effect control means (effect control device 300) in response to the reception of the predetermined one command. A case where one content (for example, “model A”) of the plurality of contents (mounted model) is set by the content setting unit (effect control device 300), and a content other than the one content (for example “ In the case where the model B ′ ′) is set, the timing at which a predetermined state occurs during the effect (in the case of this embodiment, the timing at which each of the left, middle and right decorative special symbols stop, and the reach effect are It is possible to configure different start timings (see FIG. 88).

By configuring in this manner, the plurality of contents (mounted models) include contents different from the other contents in the timing at which the predetermined state occurs during presentation, so that the difference in timing between the contents is enjoyed be able to.
The effect to be performed in response to the reception of the predetermined one command is not limited to the reach change effect, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Wait for customer demo editing process]
FIG. 81 shows the customer wait demo editing process (step C14) in the main process described above. In the customer waiting demo editing process, first, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration has already been executed (step C201).
If it is determined that the customer waiting demo has already been executed (step C201; Y), it is determined whether it is during the operation valid period of the push button (effect button 25) (step C209).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo has not been executed (step C14; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo command has been received (step C202).
If it is determined that the customer waiting demo command has not been received (step C202; N), that is, if the customer waiting demo command reception flag is not set, the customer waiting demonstration editing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting demo command has been received (step C202; Y), that is, if the customer waiting demo command reception flag is set, the customer waiting demonstration command reception flag is cleared (step 203) , Clear the customer waiting control table pointer to 0 (step C204).
Next, a demonstration control timer corresponding to the customer waiting control table pointer is set (step C205), and symbol display A is set as a demonstration status (step C206). In the case of the present embodiment, as the demo status, "symbol display A" is for about 10 seconds from the start of the customer waiting demo, and "symbol display B" for about 110 seconds from the end of symbol display A, and symbol display B "Movie display" is set for about 30 seconds from the end of, "symbol display C" for about 120 seconds from the end of movie display, "movie display" for about 30 seconds from the end of symbol display C Be done. In addition, it is also possible to further subdivide the demo status in connection with decoration and BGM.

Next, the push button effective flag during demonstration is set to be invalid (step C207), and drawing setting of the symbol display screen corresponding to the information (selected model information) saved in the selected model information area is performed (step C208), It is determined whether it is during the operation effective period of the push button (effect button 25) (step C209). In order to continue for a while (previous state etc.) before waiting for a guest for a character object device, a decoration device or a speaker device, in Step C208 (ie, at the start of a waiting for customer demonstration) There is no setting for character feature effect, decoration device effect, and speaker device effect.
If it is determined that the operation period of the push button (effect button 25) is not in effect (Step C209; N), the demo control timer is updated by -1 (Step C210), and it is determined whether the demo control timer is 0 Step C211).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation valid period of the push button (effect button 25) is in progress (step C209; Y), it is determined whether or not the push button (effect button 25) is pressed (step C212). In the case of the present embodiment, when a pressing input of the effect button 25 is received during execution of the customer waiting demo, the effect control device 300 is configured to skip the symbol display B, the symbol display C, and the movie display. That is, the player presses the effect button 25 when it is desired to stop or start the movie display.
If it is determined that the push button (effect button 25) has not been pressed (Step C212; N), the demo control timer is updated by -1 (Step C210), and it is determined whether the demo control timer is 0. (Step C211).
If it is determined that the demo control timer is not 0 (step C211; N), the customer waiting demo editing process is ended.

If it is determined that the push button (effect button 25) has been pressed (step C212; Y), or if it is determined that the demo control timer is 0 (step C211; Y), customer waiting control is performed. The table pointer is updated by +1 (step C213), and it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting control table pointer is equal to or more than the upper limit (step C214).
When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting control table pointer is equal to or more than the upper limit (step C214; Y), the pointer value of the return position is set as the customer waiting control table pointer (step C215). The demonstration control timer corresponding to is set (step C216).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the customer waiting control table pointer is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step C214; N), the processing of step C215 is not performed, and the demonstration control timer corresponding to the customer waiting control table pointer is set. (Step C216).

Then, the setting of the demo status corresponding to the customer waiting control table pointer (step C217), the setting of the demonstration push button valid flag corresponding to the customer waiting control table pointer (step C218), the decoration number corresponding to the customer waiting control table pointer Setting (step C219) and setting of the voice number corresponding to the customer waiting control table pointer (step C220). Note that a number indicating silence may be set as the voice number.
Next, drawing setting of the screen (demo movie screen or symbol display screen) corresponding to the selected model information is performed (step C221), and the customer wait demo editing process is ended.

[Model forced switching process]
FIG. 82 shows the model forced switching process (step C15) in the main process described above.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is configured to forcibly switch the selected model with the passage of time.
FIGS. 91 to 93 are diagrams showing an example of display when the selected model is forcibly switched.
For example, when the selected model is “Model A”, the effect control device 300 executes the rendering corresponding to “Model A” as shown in FIG. 91 (a). At that time, display of an image (in this example, pointing image) notifying of the selected model, display of the number of days until release of the unreleased model, and the like are performed on the sub display device 42 on the right side. In this example, in addition to the model names ("Model A" to "Model C") of released models, the model name ("Model D") of unreleased models is also displayed on the right side sub display device 42. However, model names of unreleased models may not be displayed. Further, information on unreleased models may be displayed until the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model reaches the first remaining time (10 minutes in the case of this embodiment).

When the remaining time until the forced switch of the selected model reaches the first remaining time, the effect control device 300 causes the sub display device 42 on the right to the remaining of the forced switch of the selected model, as shown in FIG. 91 (b). Display time etc.
Next, when the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model reaches the second remaining time (10 seconds in the case of the present embodiment), the effect control device 300 displays FIG. 91 (c) or FIG. 92 (a), (b). As shown in), the sub display device 42 on the right side performs countdown display of the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model or the like. At this time, the right side sub-display device 42 may be moved to the front of the display device 41.

Next, when the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model becomes 0, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure is changing. Then, when it is determined that the special figure is changing, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), the display etc. of the switching standby message (in this example, "switching standby!") Is displayed on the sub display device 42 on the right side. And wait for forced switching of the selected model.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the result of the change (the special figure change display game in progress) is stopped and displayed, the effect control device 300 determines that the special figure is not changing, and the sub Display or the like of a model switching message ("switch to model B" in this example) corresponding to the new selected model is displayed on the display unit 42. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the next special image variation display game is started, the effect control device 300 switches the selected model from “Model A” to “Model B” with the start, and The effect corresponding to "model B" is started. Furthermore, on the right side sub display device 42, display etc. of the next switching notice message (in this example, "the next switching is after 60 minutes!") Are performed.

In the present embodiment, even if the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model is 0, the forced switching of the selected model is waited if the special view is changing, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Forced switching of the selected model may be performed when the remaining time until switching of the selected model becomes 0, regardless of whether the drawing is fluctuating.
Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), even if the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model becomes 0, the effect corresponding to the next selected model is displayed on the right side sub display device 42 etc. good.

FIGS. 94 to 97 are diagrams showing another example of display when the selected model is forcibly switched. The example shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 differs from the example shown in FIGS. 91 to 93 in that forced switching of the selected model is not performed when the continuation condition (the same model continuation condition corresponding to the number of continuations) is satisfied. .
For example, when the selected model is “Model A”, the effect control device 300 executes the rendering corresponding to “Model A” as shown in FIG. 94 (a). At that time, a message (in this example, “! Model A in operation!”) Is displayed on the sub display device 42 on the right side, a character image or its name (in this example, “Toratarou”) or its level Display (in this example, “Lv. 1”) is performed. In this example, although the number of owned points in the selected model is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the display device 41, the number of owned points in the selected model may be displayed on the sub display device 42. Further, information on unreleased models may be displayed until the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model reaches the first remaining time (10 minutes in the case of this embodiment).

When the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model reaches the first remaining time, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) and (c), the effect control device 300 forces the selected sub-display device 42 to force the selected model. It displays a countdown display of the remaining time until switching, a display of a continuation condition message (in this example, “50 Pt is required to continue playing the model A.”).
Next, the reach change effect of the point addition target is executed as the change effect of the point addition target (refer to step C504 of FIG. 84), and as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the reach effect (reach When the middle effect starts, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the effect control device 300 adds points (20Pt in this example) corresponding to the reach fluctuation effect to the number of owned points in the selected model. . Then, when the number of possessed points in the selected model reaches the specified value (100 Pt in this example) by the addition, the character level is increased and the display mode of the character image is changed to the character as shown in FIG. 95 (b). Change to the display mode corresponding to the level.
In the case of this embodiment, the effect control device 300 counts down the display of the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model, and the second remaining time after the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model reaches the first remaining time ( In the case of the present embodiment, until it reaches 10 seconds, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) and (c), it is displayed as flowing from right to left, and after reaching the second remaining time As shown in FIGS. 95 (a), (b), and (c), the display is displayed without flowing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (a) and FIG. 97 (a), when the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model becomes 0, the effect control device 300 determines whether the special figure is changing or not. It is determined whether (the same model continuation condition corresponding to the number of continuations) is satisfied.
Then, when it is determined that the special figure is not changing and it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), a continuation message (“50Pt in this example”) is displayed on the right sub display device 42. Since the above is accumulated, the model A is continued ") etc. to cancel the forced switching of the selected model. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), when the next special figure variation display game is started, the effect control device 300 causes the sub display device 42 on the right to display the next switching notice message (in this example, : 00! ”Is displayed. The next switching advance notice message is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure is not changing and it is determined that the continuation condition is not satisfied, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the sub display device 42 on the right corresponds to the new selected model. The display of a model switching message (in this example, "switch to model B") is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the next special image variation display game is started, the effect control device 300 switches the selected model from “Model A” to “Model B” with the start, and The effect corresponding to "model B" is started. Also, the number of owned points displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the display device 41 is switched from the number of owned points in “Model A” to the number of owned points in “Model B”. Furthermore, on the sub display device 42 on the right side, display etc. of the next switching advance notice message (in this example, "60:00! Until switching") are displayed. The next switching advance notice message is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed.
In the present embodiment, the number of owned points is managed separately for each installed model, but there is no limitation to this, and the number of owned points may be common to all installed models.

The model forced switching process shown in FIG. 82 is a process for executing the model forced switch shown in FIGS. In this model forced switching process, first, if the model forced switching timer for measuring the remaining time until forced switching of the model is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step C301), and the selected model is selected based on the model forced switching timer. It is determined whether the remaining time until forced switching is less than or equal to the first remaining time (10 minutes in the case of this embodiment) (step C302).
If it is determined that the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model is not less than the first remaining time (step C302; N), it is determined whether the model forced switching timer has timed out (step C305).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model is equal to or less than the first remaining time (step C302; Y), drawing setting of the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model is performed (step C303) The drawing setting of the same model continuation condition corresponding to the number of continuations is performed (step C304). As a result, the display shown in FIG. 94 (b) or the like is performed on the sub display device 42. Then, it is determined whether the model forced switching timer has timed out (step C305).

If it is determined that the model forced switching timer has not timed out (step C305; N), that is, if the value of the model forced switching timer is not 0, the model forced switching process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the model forced switching timer has timed out (step C305; Y), it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation is in progress (step C306). In order to prevent the selected model from being switched at the moment when the variation display of the decoration special symbol is stopped, in step C306, it is determined whether a predetermined time has passed since the variation display of the decoration special symbol is stopped.

If it is determined that the special figure is changing (step C306; Y), that is, if the fixed time has not elapsed since the change display of the decoration special symbol is stopped, the drawing setting of the switching standby message is performed ( Step C307), the model forced switching process is ended. As a result, the display as shown in FIG. 96 (a) and FIG. 97 (a) is performed on the sub display device 42.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure is not changing (step C306; N), that is, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the change display of the decorative special symbol is stopped, the continuation condition (the same model corresponding to the number of continuation It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (step C308).

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, among the same model continuation conditions corresponding to the number of continuations, the same model continuation conditions (first stage clear condition) corresponding to the number of continuations “0 times” The same model continuation condition (second stage clear condition) corresponding to the number of owned points in the selected model is 50 Pt or more and corresponds to the number of continuations “1 time” “The number of owned points in the selected model is 100 Pt or more, and The same model continuation condition (third stage clear condition) corresponding to “character level 5 or higher” and the number of continuations being “twice” is “The number of owned points in the selected model is 300 Pt or higher, and the character level 20 or higher, and , Five or more effects appeared. The same model continuation condition corresponding to the number of continuations “three times” or more is omitted.
Thus, as it becomes difficult to clear the stage (to satisfy the continuation condition) as the stage goes up (that is, as the number of continuations increases), it is necessary to continue playing the same model. It is necessary to fit in the model.
The number of continuations is reset to 0 when the selected model is switched (including not only forced switching but also switching by point consumption (see Figure 83)), regardless of the stage before the selected model is switched, Start from the first stage.

In the present embodiment, an effect pattern or the like can be added by exchanging points (see FIG. 85). Furthermore, not only that, it is also possible to configure so that the effect pattern etc. can be added even if the stage is clear. The effect pattern added by clearing the stage and the effect pattern added by point exchange may be the same or different.
Further, in the present embodiment, the continuation condition (the same model continuation condition corresponding to the number of continuations) is the same for all the mounted models, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the continuation conditions may differ depending on the mounted models. good.

If it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied (step C308; Y), the number of continuations is updated by 1 (step C309), and drawing setting of the continuation message is performed (step C310). As a result, the display as shown in FIG. 96 (b) is performed on the sub display device 42. Next, an initial value (for example, 60 minutes) is saved in the model forced switching timer area (step C316), and the model forced switching process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuation condition is not satisfied (step C308; N), the selected model is switched, and the number of continuations is cleared to 0 (step C311) to reset the continuation condition. Therefore, the selected model information (information saved in the selected model information area) is updated within the range of released models (step C312).
Next, drawing setting of a model switching message corresponding to the new selected model is performed (step C313). As a result, the display as shown in FIG. 97 (b) is performed on the sub display device 42.

Next, drawing setting of the screen corresponding to the new selected model is performed (step C314), the internal information corresponding to the new selected model is initialized (step C315), and the model forced switching timer area is initialized to the initial value (for example, , 60 minutes) (step C316), and the model forced switching process ends.
In this embodiment, the selected model is configured to be switched in the order of “model A” → “model B” → “model C” → “model D” → “model A” →... (The unreleased models are skipped). However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a new selected model may be determined by lottery. In this case, the selected model may be the same before and after switching. Moreover, in this case, it is also possible to perform an effect (roulette effect etc.) for informing the selected model after switching (a new selected model).

Also, as shown in FIG. 99 to FIG. 102, when the number of possession points necessary for continuing the game with the same model is insufficient, the player is provided with a chance to increase the number of possession points. Is also possible.
For example, when the selected model is “Model A”, the effect control device 300 executes the rendering corresponding to “Model A” as shown in FIG. 99 (a).
When the remaining time until the forced switching of the selected model reaches the first remaining time, the effect control device 300 causes the sub display device 42 on the right to the remaining time until forced switching of the selected model, as shown in FIG. 99 (b). Display countdown of time, display of continuous condition message, etc.

Next, when the number of owned points in the selected model is small and the continuation condition (the same model continuation condition corresponding to the number of continuations) is not satisfied, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), The sub display device 42 displays a message of lack of points (in this example, "No points will be made to continue the model A.", a message asking whether to challenge the point acquisition game (in this example, "Challenge to point get Do you want to do this? Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the sub display device 42 on the right side is displayed to prompt the user to operate the rendering operation unit 550 to select whether or not to challenge the point acquisition game.
When the player operates the effect operation unit 550 and chooses to challenge the point acquisition game, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the content of the point acquisition game is displayed on the right sub display device 42. Display the message (in this example, “If you break the peach, it is 10Pt get!”) Etc., and as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the point display game effect is displayed on the sub display device 42 on the right. indicate.
Note that the display position of the point acquisition game effect is not limited to the sub display device 42 on the right side. For example, if the end timing of the point acquisition game effect is before the end of the change, the point acquisition game effect is displayed. It may be performed by the device 41, or if the effect executed by the display device 41 is a replaceable effect, the point acquiring game effect may be performed by the display device 41 in place of the effect.

When the button operation condition for point addition is satisfied (see step C507 in FIG. 84), specifically, for example, when the number of consecutive hits is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the effect control device 300 As shown in 101 (a), an image showing that the point acquisition game is successful is displayed on the right side sub display device 42, and as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the point value corresponding to the operation (this In the example, 10Pt is added to the number of possessed points in the selected model, and as shown in Fig. 101 (c), the continuation message (in this example, "Achieved! You can continue model A because it has stored 50Pt.") Display etc.).
On the other hand, when the button operation condition for point addition is not established, specifically, for example, when the number of consecutive strokes is less than the predetermined number, the effect control device 300 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in b), an image indicating that the point acquisition game has failed is displayed on the right side sub-display device 42, and as shown in FIG. Next, display etc. is expected.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes the predetermined result, the special game advantageous to the player can be executed. In the gaming machine, content setting means (effect control device 300) for setting any one of a plurality of contents (models in the case of the present embodiment) and contents (selected model) set by the content setting means And the effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing the effect corresponding to the release condition and the continuation condition are set for each of the plurality of contents (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 98). The content setting unit can set any one of the content (released model) satisfying the release condition among the plurality of contents, and the predetermined time In the case of the state, every 60 minutes), the content switching process is performed to set the content different from the set content (steps C311 to C315), and the set content satisfies the continuation condition (Step C308; Y) is configured to stop the execution of the content switching process.

  As a result, it is possible to switch the content (selected model) to be set within the range of the content (released model) satisfying the release condition, and to provide an effect corresponding to the content. Furthermore, since the content (selected model) changes each time a predetermined time has elapsed, the player can play a game with a plurality of contents. In addition, when the content being set (selected model) satisfies the continuation condition, the switching of the content is stopped, so that the player can continue playing with the favorite content. Therefore, it is possible to carry out an effect capable of obtaining a further attraction attracting effect differentiated from other game machines.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the release condition and / or the continuation condition can be configured to be different for each content (type in the case of the present embodiment).

  By configuring in this manner, the timing at which setting can be made by the content setting unit and the timing at which the content switching process can be canceled differ for each content (model), so that switching of content and continuation are allowed to have changes. Can.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the continuation condition can be configured to be different for each number of times (the number of continuations) that the content switching process is canceled.

  By configuring in this way, the continuation condition changes each time the number of times of continuation of the content (model) increases, so it is possible to give a change to the timing at which the content switching process can be canceled.

[Player model selection processing]
FIG. 83 shows the player type selection process (step 16) in the main process described above.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can switch the selected model.
As shown in FIG. 83, in the player model selection processing, first, it is determined whether the model selection mode is in progress (step C401).
If it is determined that the machine type selection mode is not in progress (step C401; N), that is, if the machine type selection mode flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the game state in which machine type selection is possible is possible (step C402). Specifically, in step C402, it is determined that the player is in a gaming state in which it is possible to select a model when, for example, a customer is waiting.
If it is determined that the game mode allows selection of a model (step C402; Y), it is determined whether a model selection start operation has been performed (step C403).

If it is determined that it is not a gaming state in which model selection is possible (step C402; N), or if it is determined that no model selection start operation has been made (step C403; N), the player model selection process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a model selection start operation (step C403; Y), the model selection mode flag is set (step C404), and drawing setting of the model selection menu is performed (step C405). In step C406, the player sets the point consumption message necessary for the user, and ends the player model selection process. As a result, the sub display device 42 displays a model selection menu and a point consumption message necessary for model selection.

If it is determined that the machine type selection mode is in progress (step C401; Y), that is, if the machine type selection mode flag is set, it is determined whether or not the game state in which machine type selection is possible is possible (step C407). Specifically, in step C407, it is determined that the game mode is such that it is possible to select a model when the special figure is not changing.
If it is determined that it is not a gaming state in which selection of a model is possible (step C407; N), the process proceeds to step C420.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game mode is such that model selection is possible (step C407; Y), it is determined whether there is a model selection operation (step C408).
If it is determined that there is no model selection operation (Step C408; N), it is determined whether there is a model determination operation (Step C411).

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a model selection operation (step C408; Y), the drawing setting of the model selection menu corresponding to the model selection operation is performed (step C409), and the point consumption message drawing setting necessary for model selection is set. (Step C410). As a result, a model selection menu corresponding to the model selection operation and a point consumption message necessary for model selection are displayed on the sub display device 42. Then, it is determined whether there is a model determination operation (step C411).
If it is determined that there is no model determination operation (step C411; N), it is determined whether there is a cancel operation (step C419).
On the other hand, when it is determined that a model determination operation has been performed (step C411; Y), it is determined whether the point necessary for model selection is owned (step C412).

If it is determined that the user does not have the points necessary for model selection (step C412; N), drawing of the point shortage message is set (step C418). As a result, a point shortage message is displayed on the sub display device 42. Then, it is determined whether there is a cancel operation (step C419).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the points necessary for model selection are owned (step C412; Y), a predetermined point value is subtracted from the number of owned points in the selected model (step C413), and a new selection is made. The drawing setting of the model switching message corresponding to the model is performed (step C414). As a result, a model switching message corresponding to the new selected model is displayed on the sub display device 42. After that, the drawing setting of the screen corresponding to the new selected model is performed (step C415), the internal information corresponding to the new selected model is initialized (step C416), and the model selection mode flag is cleared ( Step C417) It is determined whether there is a cancel operation (Step C419). The model determination operation and the cancel operation are not simultaneously established. Therefore, when the process proceeds from step C417 to step C419, it is determined in step C419 that there is no cancel operation.

If it is determined that the cancel operation has not been made (Step C419; N), the player model selection process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a cancel operation (step C419; Y), the process proceeds to step C420.
At step C420, the flag in the model selection mode is cleared (step C420). Then, deletion setting of the model selection menu is performed (step C421), deletion setting of the point consumption message necessary for model selection is performed (step C422), and the player model selection processing is ended.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation means (rendering operation unit 550) operable by the player, the input accepting means (rendering control device 300) for receiving the operation input of the operation means, and the game The point setting means (the effect control device 300; see FIG. 84) capable of giving points to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined point giving condition in When the means receives an operation input instructing the execution of the content switching process, the content switching process can be performed in exchange for the points given by the point giving means.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can switch the content (in the case of the present embodiment, the model) by paying the price (point).

[Effect point control processing]
FIG. 84 shows an effect point control process (step C17) in the main process described above. In this effect point control process, first, it is determined whether or not pre-reading effect execution for point addition is to be performed (step C501).
If it is determined that it is not at the time of pre-reading effect execution of point addition object (step C501; N), it is determined whether it is at the time of fluctuation effect execution of point addition object (step C504).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect of point addition target is executed (step C501; Y), the point value corresponding to the effect is added to the number of possessed points in the selected model (step C502). The point value corresponding to the effect is added to the acquired point number (step C503), and it is determined whether or not the variation effect target for point addition is being executed (step C504).

When it is determined that it is not at the time of the fluctuation effect execution of the point addition target (step C504; N), it is determined whether the button operation condition to be the point addition target is satisfied (step C507).
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is at the time of the fluctuation effect execution of the point addition object (step C504; Y), the point value corresponding to the effect is added to the number of possessed points in the selected model (step C505) A point value corresponding to the effect is added to the number of acquired points (step C506), and it is determined whether a button operation condition to be added is satisfied (step C507).

If it is determined that the button operation condition subject to point addition is not satisfied (step C507; N), it is determined whether the number of owned points in the selected model satisfies the character level increase condition (step C510).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the button operation condition for point addition is satisfied (step C507; Y), the point value corresponding to the operation is added to the number of possessed points in the selected model (step C508) A point value corresponding to the operation is added to the number of points acquired during the game (step C509). As a result, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the number of owned points in the selected model increases. Then, it is determined whether the number of owned points in the selected model satisfies the character level increase condition (step C510).

If it is determined that the number of owned points in the selected model does not satisfy the character level increase condition (step C510; N), it is determined whether a point recovery condition by password input is satisfied (step C513).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of possessed points in the selected model satisfies the character level increase condition (step C510; Y), the character level is updated (step C511), and drawing setting of the character level increase effect is performed. (Step C512). As a result, an effect as shown in FIG. 95 (b) is displayed on the display device 41 and the sub display device 42. Then, it is determined whether a point recovery condition by password input is satisfied (step C513).

If it is determined that the point recovery condition by password input is not satisfied (step C513; N), that is, if the input password is not correct, it is determined whether a two-dimensional code drawing operation has been performed (step C516).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the point recovery condition by password input is satisfied (step C513; N), that is, if the input password is correct, the number of owned points in each installed model corresponds to the content of the password. The value is set (step C514), the character level corresponding to the content of the password, and the effect customization information for each installed model corresponding to the content of the password are restored (step C515), and it is determined whether a two-dimensional code drawing operation has been performed. (Step C516).

If it is determined that the two-dimensional code drawing operation has not been made (Step C516; N), the effect point control process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation (step C516; Y), a password is generated from the number of owned points in each installed model, character level, and presentation customization information for each installed model (step C517). The drawing point setting of the two-dimensional code corresponding to the generated password is performed (step C518), and the effect point control process is ended.
In addition, the point addition condition is the condition that it is at the time of pre-reading effect execution of point addition object,
There is no limitation to the condition that the variation effect is being executed for point addition, and the condition that the button operation condition for point addition is satisfied, and it is possible to change as appropriate. A condition may be added that the game ball has passed through the predetermined area.

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is desired to take over the game information up to this time even in the next game, the player uses the effect operation unit 550 to perform a two-dimensional code drawing operation (two-dimensional code An operation to instruct display is performed, and at the start of the next game, a password input operation is performed using the effect operation unit 550.
Specifically, when there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation, the effect control device 300 is based on the current game information (the number of possessed points in each installed model, character level, effect customization information for each installed model, etc.) The password is generated, and a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) corresponding to the generated password is displayed on the display device 41 or the sub display device 42. Then, when the player reads the two-dimensional code with a mobile phone or the like to access the main server from the web, a password corresponding to the two-dimensional code (that is, the password generated in step C517) is obtained. When the password is input to the gaming machine 10 at the start of the next game, the gaming information when the gaming machine 10 generates the password from the main server (the number of owned points in each installed model, the character level, and the installed model) The effect customization information etc.) is acquired and set, and the game can be resumed from the state at the end of the previous game.
Note that the selected model or stage (see FIG. 98) may also be taken over by resuming the game by the password.

[Effect customization process]
FIG. 85 shows the effect customization process (step C72) in the above-mentioned hall / player setting mode process.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can customize the effect contents.
FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 are views showing an example of display when the player customizes the effect contents.

For example, when the selected model is "Model A", the effect control device 300 executes the rendering corresponding to "Model A" as shown in FIG. 103 (a). At this time, if the number of possessed points in the selected model (here, “model A”) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a message notifying that the sub-display device 42 on the right can customize the effect content (in this example Display etc. "I can choose the effect".
In this example, a message notifying that the effect content can be customized is displayed so as to flow from right to left. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the message may be displayed without flowing. is there.
In addition, if the number of owned points on the selected model is less than the specified value, a message notifying that the effect content can not be customized is displayed on the sub display device 42 on the right (for example, “You can select the effect with xxx Pt”) ) May be displayed.

The effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), performs, for example, a display prompting the effect customization start operation on the right side sub display device 42 at a predetermined timing.
When the player performs the effect customization start operation using the effect operation unit 550, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the effect customize menu (in this example, the effect pattern is selected on the sub display device 42 on the right). Display of a change menu indicating a genre that can be added, display prompting for an item selection operation, display of a message notifying the type of the displayed menu (in this example, "display change menu") are performed.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the player performs an item selection operation using the effect operation unit 550, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the display of the customization menu corresponding to the item selection operation , Display of a point consumption message necessary for item selection (in this example, a message indicating the number of points necessary for adding a rendering pattern), a display prompting an item determination operation, a message notifying the type of menu being displayed (this example Then, the display etc. of "reach change menu displayed" is performed.
In this example, since the player has performed an operation to select "reach variation effect" as the item selection operation, a reach change menu indicating an addable reach variation effect pattern is displayed as a customization menu corresponding to the item selection operation. There is. At that time, it is also possible to display a sample of each effect pattern in the reach change menu on the sub display device 42 on the right side. Moreover, it is also possible to limit the display of the sample to only a specific effect pattern (for example, effect patterns other than the premier effect pattern).

When the player performs an item determination operation (in this example, an operation to select and determine a Δ △ reach pattern) using the effect operation unit 550, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), the selected model is selected. Subtract a predetermined point value (in this example, 100Pt corresponding to ΔΔ reach pattern) from the owned point number of to the sub display device 42 on the right side, and the effect customization item reflection message (in this example, “ΔΔ reach "Fever heat!"
In this example, the message notifying the type of menu being displayed, and the effect customization item reflection message are displayed without being fixed and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these messages are displayed from right to left It is also possible to display in a flowing manner.

In the present embodiment, in order to continue the same model, it is necessary to store points, but if the points are not consumed, the contents of the presentation can not be customized. Therefore, in addition to the game itself, the player is provided with a new interest, such as whether to give preference to continuation of the same model or customization of the presentation content, and at which timing customization of the presentation content is to be performed (to consume points). be able to.
In the present embodiment, as the customization of the effect content, the addition of the reach variation effect, the advance effect effect, and the effect pattern of the advance effect effect is possible, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Specifically, the pattern of the weapon possessed by the character, the addition of the pattern of clothes worn by the character, etc. may be used. Furthermore, it may be possible to select whether to use the added pattern. Also, a pattern may be provided which can be added without consuming points.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the effect customization process, first, it is determined whether the effect customization mode is in progress (step C81).
If it is determined that the effect customization mode is not in progress (step C81; N), that is, if the effect customization mode flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the game state in which customization of the effect content is possible (step C82) . Specifically, in step C82, it is determined that the game state in which customization of the effect content is possible is possible when, for example, customers are waiting.
If it is determined that the game state is such that customization of the effect contents is possible (step C82; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an effect customization start operation (step C83).

If it is determined that the game state is not such that customization of the effect content is possible (step C82; N), or if it is determined that the effect customization start operation has not been performed (step C83; N), the effect customization process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect customization start operation has been made (step C83; Y), specifically, for example, when the effect operation unit 550 is operated in FIG. After setting (step C84), rendering setting of the effect customization menu is performed (step C85), and the effect customization process is ended. Thereby, the display as shown in FIG. 103 (c) is performed on the sub display device 42.

If it is determined that the effect customization mode is in progress (step C81; Y), that is, if the effect customization mode flag is set, it is determined whether or not the game state in which the effect content can be customized is possible ( Step C86). Specifically, in step C86, it is determined that the game state in which customization of the effect content is possible is possible when the special figure is not in motion or the like.
If it is determined that the game state is not such that customization of the effect contents is possible (step C86; N), the process proceeds to step C97.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state allows customization of the effect contents (step C86; Y), it is determined whether an item selection operation has been made (step C87).
If it is determined that the item selection operation has not been performed (step C87; N), it is determined whether the item determination operation has been performed (step C90).

On the other hand, when it is determined that an item selection operation has been performed (step C87; Y), specifically, for example, when the effect operation unit 550 is operated as shown in FIG. 104A, the item selection operation is supported. The drawing setting of the customizing menu to be performed is made (step C88), and the drawing setting of the point consumption message necessary for item selection is made (step C89). Thereby, the display as shown in FIG. 104 (b) is performed on the sub display device 42. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not an item determination operation has been performed (step C90).
If it is determined that the item determination operation has not been performed (step C90; N), it is determined whether the effect customization end operation has been performed (step C96).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the item determination operation has been performed (step C90; Y), it is determined whether the point necessary for item selection is possessed (step C91).

If it is determined that the points necessary for item selection are not owned (step C91; N), the point lack message is drawn and set (step C95). As a result, a point shortage message is displayed on the sub display device 42. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an effect customization end operation (step C96).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the points necessary for item selection are owned (step C91; Y), the predetermined point value is subtracted from the number of owned points in the selected model (step C92), and the determined items The rendering setting of the effect customization item reflecting message corresponding to is performed (step C93), and the effect customization information of the determined item is set and saved (step C94). As a result, the display as shown in FIG. 104C is performed on the sub display device 42. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an effect customization end operation (step C96).

If it is determined that the effect customization end operation has not been made (step C96; N), the effect customization process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect customization end operation has been performed (step C96; Y), the process proceeds to step C97.
At step C97, the in-effect customization mode flag is cleared (step C97). Then, deletion setting of the effect customization menu is performed (step C98), and the effect customization process is ended.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. In particular, the screen shot function and the setting function of the customer waiting demonstration effect can be applied. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 100 game control device (game control means)
300 Effect control device (content setting means, effect control means, input accepting means, point giving means)
321 PROM (storage means)
323 FeRAM (storage means)
550 production operation unit (operation means)

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a predetermined result.
Content setting means for setting any one of a plurality of contents;
Effect control means for executing an effect corresponding to the content set by the content setting means, and displaying an image relating to the content on a display device;
A release condition is set for each of the plurality of contents,
The content setting means can set any one of the contents satisfying the release condition among the plurality of contents,
The effect control means is
During a predetermined period, the display area of the display device is divided into a plurality of areas corresponding to each of the plurality of contents,
In the area corresponding to the content satisfying the release condition, regardless of whether or not the content is set by the content setting means, the video concerning the content is set by the content setting means In the same way ,
In the area corresponding to the content not satisfying the release condition, it is possible to display video other than the video related to the content.   2. The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the effect control means can display blank video or video relating to contents other than the plurality of contents in an area corresponding to the content not satisfying the release condition. Gaming machine. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a predetermined result.
Content setting means for setting any one of a plurality of contents;
Effect control means for executing an effect corresponding to the content set by the content setting means, and displaying an image relating to the content on a display device;
A release condition is set for each of the plurality of contents,
The content setting means can set any one of the contents satisfying the release condition among the plurality of contents,
The effect control means is
During a predetermined period, the display area of the display device is divided into a plurality of areas corresponding to each of the plurality of contents,
In the area corresponding to the content satisfying the release condition, regardless of whether or not the content is set by the content setting means, the video concerning the content is set by the content setting means In the same way ,
A game machine characterized in that an image related to the content can be displayed in an area corresponding to the content not satisfying the release condition with a limited amount of information obtained from the image.   The effect control means is an image generated based on an image related to the content in an area corresponding to the content not satisfying the release condition, and at least a portion of the image with at least a portion being mosaiced 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein any one of the second image and the fade-in image can be displayed.